ALFA ROMEO GIULIA
Third Edition Rev 1
Owner’s Manual
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.
Printed in U.S.A.
2018 OWNER’S MANUAL
18GABASE-126-AC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
3628065 Cover.indd 2 7/2/18 8:44 AM
DEAR CUSTOMER
Dear Customer,
We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way.
Please take the necessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle.
Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance
from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo.
You are advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar
with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle behavior on
different road surfaces.
This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving,
care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time.
In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The New
Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.
We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people
at Alfa Romeo.
For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact the Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center:
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI
48321–8004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA
(1-844-253-2872)
READ THIS CAREFULLY
Refueling
Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital components
of the supply system.
For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see the "Fuel Requirements" paragraph in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.
Starting The Engine
Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then push
the engine START/STOP button.
Parking On Flammable Material
The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable
material: fire hazard.
Respecting The Environment
The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the
environment.
Electrical Accessories
If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact your authorized
dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.
Scheduled Servicing
Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and
safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs.
VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS
Accessories Purchased By The Owner
Warning!
Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could
even be fatally injured.
If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or
accessories that in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact your authorized dealer. Dealer personnel
will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a
more powerful battery.
Note: Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation
of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the
pedals (mats, etc.).
FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US
LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.
Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices
FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance
with manufacturer's specifications.
Note: Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed.
This also may void the warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it.
FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US
LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.
Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones
Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB (Citizen Band) radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle
unless a separate antenna is mounted externally.
Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of
approved mobile phones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer.
Caution!
The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction.
This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health.
If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive
Entry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur.
HOWTO USE THIS MANUAL
Operating Instructions
Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the
perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the
text as appropriate.
The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual
arrangement of your vehicle.
To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to
know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the
side of each even page.
Warnings And Cautions
While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the
components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle.
Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:
Personal Safety:
Vehicle Safety:
Note: This Owner’s Manual describes all vehicle models. Optional contents, equipment meant for specific Markets or particular
models are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the model you own. Any
content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will
be identified by the indicator: — if equipped.
The data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims for
constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described
for technical and/or commercial reasons.
For further information, contact your authorized dealer.
Symbols
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is
important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.
READ THE OWNER
HANDBOOK
DO NOTTOUCHWITH
HANDS
IT CAN START
AUTOMATICALLY ALSO
WITH ENGINE OFF
PROTECTYOUR EYES
DO NOTOPEN THE CAP
WHEN THE ENGINE IS
HOT
DO NOTOPEN: HIGH
PRESSURE GAS
KEEP CHILDREN AT A
DISTANCE
BURSTING
MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS
OF YOUR BODY AND
CLOTHES AWAY
DO NOTAPPROACH
FLAMES
CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE
This page is intentionally left blank
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONTVIEW
03016S0001EM
Front View
1 — Headlights 4 — Doors
2 — Tires And Wheels 5 — Engine Compartment
3 — Power Windows 6 — Windshield
9
REAR VIEW
03026S0001EM
Rear View
1 — Tail Lights
2 — Trunk Lid
10
INSTRUMENT PANEL
03036S0050EMB
Instrument Panel
1 — Headlight Switch 5 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Control System
2 — Air Vents 6 — Steering Wheel 10 — Glove Compartment
3 — Multifunction Stalk 7 — Windshield Wiper Stalk 11 — Passenger-Side Air Bag
4 — Controls On Steering Wheel 8 — Information And Entertainment
System
11
VEHICLE INTERIOR
03046S0001EMB
Vehicle Interior
1 — Driver Seat 3 — Gear Selector/Paddle Shifter — If
Equipped
2 — Power Windows/Power Mirrors Controls 4 — Hazard Warning Lights 5 — Alfa DNA System
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In this section, you will find important
information to help you become familiar
with the features needed to operate your
vehicle, and how they function.
KEYS ....................14
IGNITION SYSTEM ............16
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER .........18
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED .................19
DOORS...................20
SEATS....................25
HEAD RESTRAINTS ...........29
STEERING WHEEL ............31
MIRRORS ..................32
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ............33
INTERIOR LIGHTS ............36
WINDSHIELD WIPERS ..........40
CLIMATE CONTROL ...........42
POWERWINDOWS............49
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . .50
HOOD....................52
TRUNK ...................53
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT .........54
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
SYSTEMS..................58
13
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition
system. This system includes a key fob
and a keyless push button ignition.
The Remote Keyless Entry key fob allows
you to lock or unlock the doors and trunk
or activate the Panic Alarm from
distances. The key fob does not need to
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
PANIC Function
The key fob contains a PANIC button.
Should you ever feel threatened, push
this button and the vehicle security alarm
will sound.
To activate the PANIC function, push and
hold the PANIC button for at least one
second. When the panic alarm is active,
the headlights turn on, the turn signals
flash, the horn honks intermittently, and
all interior adjustable lights turn on. The
panic alarm will remain active for three
minutes, and can be deactivated:
By pushing the PANIC button again.
Automatically if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
In both cases, the panic alarm is
immediately deactivated.
Warning!
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK, apply
the parking brake, turn the engine OFF,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
Operation
Door And Trunk Lid Unlock
Briefly pushing the unlock button on the
key fob will unlock the doors and trunk
lid, turn on the interior lights, and flash
the turn signals once (if activated from
the Information and Entertainment
System).
Push and release the unlock button on the
key fob once to unlock the driver side
front door or twice within one second to
unlock all doors and the trunk lid.
The current unlock setting can be
changed through the Information and
Entertainment System menu, so that the
system unlocks:
All doors unlock on the first push of
the key fob unlock button.
Unlock the driver door on the first
push of the key fob unlock button.
Flashing of the turn signals upon
locking/unlocking the doors and
activation of the courtesy light upon
unlocking the doors can be activated or
deactivated through the Information and
Entertainment System. For further
information, refer to the Information and
Entertainment System Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
The doors can also be unlocked by using
the emergency key, located inside the
key fob.
04016S0001EM
Key Fob
14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Door And Trunk Lid Lock
Briefly pushing the lock button on the key
fob will lock the doors and trunk lid, turn
off the interior lights, and flash the turn
signals (if activated in the Information
and Entertainment System).
If one or more doors are open, these
doors will also lock, and this is indicated
by a rapid flashing of the turn signals. The
doors prepare for locking, which
becomes active from the moment they
are closed. The doors will unlock again
only if the key fob is detected inside the
passenger compartment.
The doors can be locked by using the
emergency key in the driver’s side door
lock.
Trunk Lid Opening
Rapidly push the trunk lid key fob button
twice to open the trunk lid. The turn
signals will flash to indicate that the
trunk lid has been opened.
Remote Start
The remote start button on the key fob
enables engine starting (push the button
twice within five seconds to start the
engine).
Car Finder
Push the lock or unlock button to
remotely and temporarily turn on the turn
signals and headlights.
This is useful for finding the vehicle easily
in a crowded area like a parking garage,
for example.
Pushing the lock or unlock button again
will restart the lights turn on timer (if the
parking lights functions were already
active, it will remain active).
This function is available only if the doors
are closed.
Replacing The Electronic Key Fob
Battery
To replace the battery, proceed as
follows:
1. Push the sides of the key fob inward
and extract the cover pulling downwards.
2. Remove the emergency key from its
housing.
3. Remove the battery plug by rotating it
counter clockwise.
04016S0002EM
Key Fob Cover Removal
04016S0003EM
Removing Emergency Key
04016S0004EM
Removing Battery Plug
15
4. Remove the battery from its slot and
replace it with a new one of the same
type.
Proceed in reverse order to reassemble
the key.
Caution!
The battery replacement operation must be
done with care, in order not to damage the
electronic key.
Request For Additional Keys
The system can recognize up to eight key
fobs with remote control.
To guarantee that the engine starts and
the vehicle operates correctly, use only
electronic key fobs specifically coded for
the vehicle’s electronics.
If an electronic key fob is coded for a
vehicle, it cannot be used on any other
vehicle.
Duplicating Keys
If you need a replacement key fob, go to
an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement
applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)
devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SYSTEM
Operation
To activate the keyless ignition, the key
fob must be inside the passenger
compartment.
The keyless ignition has the following
modes:
STOP: engine off, steering locked.
Some electrical devices (e.g. central door
locking system, alarm, etc.) are still
available.
ON: all electrical devices are available.
This state can be entered by pushing the
ignition button once, without pressing the
brake pedal.
AVV: engine starting. This state can be
entered by pushing the ignition button
once while pressing the brake pedal.
04016S0005EM
Battery Location
04026S0001EM
Keyless Ignition START/STOP Button
16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Note:
With the keyless ignition in the ON
position: if 30 minutes pass with the
gear selector in P (Park) and the engine
stopped, the keyless ignition will
automatically reset to the STOP
position.
With the engine started, it is possible
to remove the key fob from the vehicle.
The engine will remain running and the
instrument cluster will indicate the
absence of the key fob when the door is
closed.
For more information on the engine
start-up, refer to "Starting The Engine" in
"Starting And Operating."
Warning!
Never use the PARK position as a
substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition in the
AVV or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully
disengaged before driving; failure to do so
can lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave
the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so
may allow the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking
brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious
damage to the brake system.
Caution!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains
on with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
Starting With A Discharged Key Fob
Battery
If the key fob battery is discharged,
proceed as follows to start the vehicle:
1. Lift the front armrest.
2. Lay the key fob on the key fob outline
found on the floor of the armrest
compartment while pushing the
START/STOP button to start the ignition.
04026S0002EM
Key Fob Placement Location
17
General Information
The following regulatory statement
applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)
devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER
Engine Immobilizer Operation
The Engine Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized use of the vehicle by
disabling engine starting.
The system does not need to be enabled
or activated. Operation of the
immobilizer is automatic whether the
vehicle's doors are locked or unlocked.
When the ignition is set to ON, the Engine
Immobilizer system identifies the code
transmitted by the key. If the code is
recognized as valid, the Engine
Immobilizer system enables engine
starting.
When the ignition is brought back to
STOP, the Engine Immobilizer system
deactivates the control unit controlling
the engine, disabling engine starting.
For the correct engine starting
procedures, refer to “Starting The
Engine” in “Starting And Operating.”
Irregular Operation
If the key code is not recognized during
starting, the Engine Immobilizer
Failure/Break-in Attempt
icon is
displayed on the instrument panel (refer
to "Warning Lights And Messages" in
"Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel"). This condition leads to the engine
turning off after two seconds. In this
case, switch the ignition to STOP and
then to ON; if it is still blocked, try with
the other keys provided. If it is still not
possible to start the engine, contact an
authorized dealer.
If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/
Break-in Attempt
icon is displayed
while driving, this means that the system
is running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a
voltage drop). If the display persists,
contact an authorized dealer.
Note:
Do not tamper with the Engine
Immobilizer system. Any modifications
or alterations could cause the protection
function to be deactivated.
The Engine Immobilizer system is not
compatible with certain aftermarket
remote starting systems. The use of
these devices could cause problems
when starting, as well as the
deactivation of the protection function.
All keys provided with the vehicle
have been programmed in accordance
with the electronics on the vehicle itself.
Each key has its own code which must
be stored by the system's control unit.
Contact an authorized dealer to have
new keys (up to eight) stored with a
code.
18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Alarm Activation
While armed, the alarm will sound in the
following scenarios:
Opening of doors/hood/trunk lid
(perimeter protection)
Operation of ignition with a key which
is not validated
Cutting of the battery cables
Movement inside the passenger
compartment (volumetric protection — if
equipped)
Unexpected lifting/tilting of the
vehicle (anti-lift protection — if
equipped)
Activation of the alarm triggers the
acoustic warning and the turn signals.
Note: The alarm system is activated by
the Engine Immobilizer system, which is
automatically activated when you get out
of the vehicle with the key fob and lock
the doors.
To Arm The Alarm
With the doors, hood, and trunk lid closed
and the keyless ignition system placed in
the STOP position, push and release the
lock button on the key fob. The alarm can
also be armed by pushing the Passive
Entry door handle button, located on the
exterior door handle. For further
information, refer to "Passive Entry" in
"Doors.”
When the alarm is armed, the warning
lights on the panels of the interior front
door handles will flash.
The activation of the alarm is preceded
by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is
detected, the system emits a further
acoustic signal.
If a second acoustic signal is emitted
after the alarm is already armed, wait
about four seconds and disarm the alarm
by pushing the unlock button. Verify that
the doors, hood, and trunk lid are closed
correctly and then rearm the system by
pushing the lock button on the key fob.
If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even
when the doors, hood, and trunk lid are
correctly closed, a fault has occurred in
system operation. In this case, contact an
authorized dealer.
To Disarm The Alarm
Push the unlock button to disarm the
alarm. While disarming, the following
operations are performed:
Two brief flashes of the turn signals (if
programmed)
Two brief acoustic signals (if
programmed)
Doors are unlocked
The alarm can also be disarmed using the
Passive Entry System, by grasping one of
the Passive Entry front door handles with
a valid key fob in hand to unlock. For
further information refer to "Passive
Entry" in "Doors.”
04056S0003EM
Passive Entry Door Handle Button
04046S0001EM
Lock/Unlock Buttons
19
Note: The alarm does not disarm when
the doors are unlocked by inserting the
blade of the emergency key, found inside
the key fob, into the door handle lock
cylinder.
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection — If
Equipped
To ensure the correct operation of the
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system,
completely close the side windows.
To disable the function, push the
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button
before activating the alarm.
When the function is disabled, this is
indicated by the light on the
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button
flashing for several seconds.
Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift
Protection must be repeated each time
the instrument panel is switched off.
To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive
Entry
To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g.
during a long period of vehicle inactivity),
insert the blade of the emergency key,
found inside the key fob, into the door
handle lock cylinder and turn the
emergency key to the right (clockwise) to
lock the door(s).
DOORS
Locking And Unlocking Doors From The
Inside
If all doors are closed properly, they will
automatically lock once the vehicle has
exceeded approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) (“Auto Relock” function active).
Push the interior lock button on the driver
or passenger side door panel trim to lock
the doors.
With doors locked, push the unlock
button on the interior trim panel to
unlock the doors.
Note: The key fob may not be found if it
is located next to a mobile phone, lap top
or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
04056S0003EM
Passive Entry Door Handle Button
04046S0002EM
Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection Button
04056S0001EM
Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel
20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Warning!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as
you drive as well as when you park and leave
the vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK, apply
the parking brake, turn the engine OFF,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Caution!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
Locking/Unlocking Doors From The
Outside
When locking the doors from the outside
with the doors closed, push the lock
button on the key fob.
The door lock can be activated with all
doors locked and the trunk lid open. When
the lock button on the key fob is pushed,
all locks are activated, including the open
trunk lid. The trunk lid will be locked when
it is closed.
When unlocking the doors from the
outside, push the unlock button on the
key fob.
Locking/Unlocking Doors From The
Outside In An Emergency
If the battery is discharged or the key fob
is inoperable, you can lock or unlock the
doors from the outside by inserting the
blade of the emergency key, found inside
the key fob, into the door handle lock
cylinder and turn the emergency key as
follows.
Lock — Turn the emergency key to the
right (clockwise)
Unlock — Turn the emergency key to
the left (counter clockwise)
Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system can identify
the presence of a key fob near the doors
and trunk lid.
The system enables the doors and trunk
lid to be locked or unlocked without
pushing any button on the key fob.
The key fob is detected only after the
system recognizes the presence of a
hand on one of the front door handles. If
the detected key fob is valid, the doors
and the trunk lid are unlocked (refer to
the Information and Entertainment
System Owner’s Manual Supplement for
Passive Entry Settings).
Note: The key fob may not be able to be
detected by the vehicle keyless-go
system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the
vehicle.
21
Grasping the handle of the driver's door
unlocks the driver's side door, or all doors
depending on the mode set using the
Information and Entertainment System
(refer to the Information and
Entertainment System Owner’s Manual
Supplement for Passive Entry Settings).
Note: If wearing gloves, or if it has rained
and the door handle is wet, the activation
sensitivity of the Passive Entry function
may be reduced, resulting in a longer
reaction time.
Door Locking
To lock the doors, proceed as follows:
1. Make sure that you have the key fob
and are close to the driver’s or
passenger’s side door handle.
2. Push the Passive Entry door handle
button or the Passive Entry trunk lid
button, which is located next to the
exterior trunk lid release button. This will
lock all doors and the trunk lid. Door
locking will activate the alarm as well.
Note: After pushing the Passive Entry
door handle button, you must wait two
seconds before the doors can be
unlocked again using the passive entry
door handle button. This feature makes it
possible to check whether the vehicle has
been locked correctly by pulling the door
handle within two seconds. The doors will
not be unlocked again.
The vehicle doors and trunk lid can be
locked by pushing the lock button on the
key fob or on the interior door lock.
Driver Side Door Emergency Opening
If the key fob does not work, e.g. because
its battery is discharged or the vehicle
battery is discharged, the emergency key
can be used to unlock the driver side
door.
To remove the emergency key from the
key fob, proceed as follows:
1. Push the sides of the key fob inward
and extract the cover pulling downwards.
2. Remove the emergency key from the
key fob housing.
3. Insert the emergency key in the driver
side door lock cylinder and turn it to the
left (counter clockwise) to unlock the
door.
Note:
The emergency key blade is not
directional and can be inserted
indifferently into the lock.
04056S0003EM
Passive Entry Door Handle Button
04056S0005EM
Exterior Trunk Lid Button
04016S0002EM
Emergency Key Release Buttons
04016S0003EM
Emergency Key
22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To avoid leaving the key fob inside
the vehicle accidentally, the Passive
Entry function features an automatic
door unlocking function.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and
the "door locking" button on the front
door handles or lock button in the
interior door lock switch panel is pushed,
a check of the inside and outside of the
vehicle for the presence of the key fob is
made once all the open doors are closed.
While pulling the handle, do not push the
door lock/unlock button on the handle.
If the key fob is detected inside the
vehicle, the Passive Entry function
automatically unlocks all the vehicle
doors and flashes the turn signals.
If one or more key fobs are inside the
passenger compartment, the lock button
on the key fob inside the passenger
compartment is temporarily disabled.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors if an
unauthorized key fob has been detected
close to the outside of the vehicle.
If the Passive Entry function is disabled
using the Information and Entertainment
System, the protections to avoid
accidentally leaving the key fob inside
the vehicle are deactivated.
Trunk Lid Access
Approaching the trunk lid with a valid key
fob, push the opening button to access
the trunk lid.
Note:
If the key fob is inadvertently
forgotten inside of the trunk, and an
attempt is made to close it from outside,
the trunk lid will not lock. With the doors
locked, the trunk lid unlocked, and the
key fob detected inside the vehicle, the
trunk lid will unlock again and the lights
flash twice.
Before driving, make sure the trunk
lid is closed correctly.
Trunk Lid Lock
The trunk lid of the vehicle may still be
locked by pushing the lock button on the
key fob, pushing the door lock button on
the door handles, or pushing the lock
button on the interior door panel of the
vehicle.
04056S0003EM
Passive Entry Door Handle Button
04056S0001EM
Interior Lock Switch Panel
04056S0004EM
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When
Locking
04056S0005EM
Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button
23
On vehicles equipped with Passive Entry,
the trunk lid and the doors can be locked
by pushing the button located near the
opening button of the trunk lid.
System Activation/Deactivation
The Passive entry system can be
activated or deactivated using the
Information and Entertainment System.
General Information
The following regulatory statement
applies to all radio frequency (RF)
devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Child Safety Locks
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear
doors are equipped with Child-Protection
Door Lock system.
This device can be engaged only with the
doors open.
Lock position: device locked (door
opened from exterior only)
Unlock position: device unlocked (door
may be opened from the inside)
The Child Safety Locks remain locked
even if the doors are unlocked.
Note: The rear doors cannot be opened
from the inside when the Child Safety
Lock is engaged.
Unlocking The Doors With A Discharged
Battery
Proceed as follows to unlock the doors if
the vehicle battery is discharged.
Rear Doors And Passenger Door
1. With the doors unlocked insert the
emergency key from the key fob or a flat
bladed screwdriver into the door lock
manual release lock cylinder.
04056S0005EM
Exterior Trunk Lid Button
04056S0007EM
Child Safety Lock Positions
04056S0008EM
Door Lock Manual Release Lock
Cylinder
24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Turn the manual release lock cylinder
clockwise for the right door locks or
counterclockwise for the left door locks.
3. Remove the key/screwdriver from the
manual release lock.
Proceed in one of the following ways to
realign the door lock device (only when
the battery charge has been restored):
Push the lock button on the electronic
key
Push the unlock button on the door
panel
Unlock driver’s door lock with the
emergency key
Operate the internal door handle
Note: For the rear doors, if the Child
Safety Locks are engaged, and the
previously described locking procedure is
carried out, operating the internal handle
will not open the door. Instead, it will only
realign the lock release device. To open
the door, the outside handle must be
used. The door central locking/unlocking
buttons are not deactivated when the
emergency lock is engaged.
SEATS
The front seats can be adjusted to ensure
maximum comfort for the occupants.
When adjusting the driver’s seat, keep
the shoulders resting firmly against the
backrest, and the wrists within reach of
the top of the steering wheel. The driver
must also be able to fully press the brake
pedal.
Warning!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
The power seat switches are located on
the outboard side of the seat near the
floor. Use these switches to move the
driver's seat up, down, forward, rearward,
or to recline the seatback.
Caution!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel
may become limited if movement is stopped
by an obstruction in the seat's path.
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
Push the seat switch forward or rearward
to adjust to your desired position.
04066S0003EM
Power Seat Adjustment
1 — Seat Adjustment
2 — Recline Adjustment
3 — Lumbar Adjustment
25
Seatback Recline
The angle of the seatback can be
adjusted forward or rearward. Push the
seatback switch in the desired direction,
and the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar
The power lumbar switch is located on
the outboard side of the power seat. Push
the switch forward or rearward to
increase or decrease the lumbar support.
Push the switch upward or downward to
raise or lower the lumbar support.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push
downward on the seat switch, and the
seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the
desired position is reached.
Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting) — If
Equipped
The seat angle can be adjusted in four
directions. Lift or push the front part of
seat switch to move the front part of the
seat in the corresponding direction.
Release the seat switch when the seat
has reached the desired position.
Power Bolster Adjustment — If
Equipped
Push the power bolster adjustment
buttons to regulate the width of the
backrest through the lateral padding.
Seat Cushion Extension — If Equipped
Lift the adjustment lever and push the
front of the cushion forward or rearward
to extend the cushion by a few inches
(centimeters).
Driver Memory Seat
Storing and recalling can be done with the
ignition in the ON mode, vehicle speed at
0 mph (0 km/h), and the driver’s side door
closed, or for three minutes after having
opened the driver's side door. An audible
chime is heard to confirm a memory
profile is set or recalled. To set a memory
profile, first adjust your seat (and power
mirror position if desired) until you are in
the desired position. Then, push the
memory button you want to assign the
set position to for 1.5 seconds. When a
new seat position is memorized, the
previously memorized position on the
same button is automatically
overwritten. Recalling a memorized
position can also be done for
approximately three minutes after the
doors are opened and for approximately
one minute after the engine is stopped.
To recall a memorized position, push the
assigned button briefly.
04066S0015EM
Seatback Width Adjustment
4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons
5 — Driver Memory Seat Buttons
04066S0017EM
Seat Cushion Extension
6 — Adjustment Lever
26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Warning!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before
fastening the seat belts and while the
vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death
could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
With the engine in the ON position, push
the driver or passenger heated seat
button
located on the instrument
panel.
You can select three heating levels:
Maximum — three LED indicators
illuminated on the buttons
Average — two LED indicators
illuminated on the buttons
Minimum — one LED indicator
illuminated on the buttons
After selecting a heating level, heat will
be felt within a few minutes.
A quick push of the heated seat button
will select the heat levels in order of
highest to lowest. A fourth push of the
button will turn the heated seat off.
The “minimum” setting is automatically
deactivated once a certain period of time
has elapsed. This varies on a
case-by-case basis, in accordance with
the specific operating conditions.
Rear Heated Seats
If equipped with rear heated seats, the
controls can be found on the rear of the
center console and will function the same
as the front heated seat controls.
Note: To preserve the battery charge,
this function cannot be activated when
the engine is off.
Warning!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or
seatback that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat
that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
Rear Seats
The rear seats allow for three
passengers.
Note: Middle Seat: The rear seat is
designed as a 4+1 seat vehicle. The
middle seat is of limited use. It is
recommended that this seat only be used
by a person who can use the backrest as a
substitute for the head restraint.
04066S0004EM1
Heated Seat Buttons
27
The seats and the seatbelts are
considered components of the vehicle’s
Occupant Restraint System.
Note: Refer to the "Seat Belt Systems"
in "Safety" for further information.
Split Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded
forward to provide an additional storage
area.
Partial Extension Of The Luggage
Compartment (1/3 Or 2/3)
Extending the right side of the trunk
allows you to carry two passengers on
the left part of the rear seat, while
extending the left side allows you to
carry one passenger.
Proceed as follows:
1. Completely lower the rear seat head
restraints.
2. Place the seatbelt so that it doesn't
impede the movement of the backrest
while tilting it.
3. From inside the luggage
compartment, operate lever 1 to tilt the
left part or lever 2 to tilt the right part of
the backrest: it will automatically tilt
forward. If necessary, assist the backrest
during the initial stage of tilting.
Full Expansion Of The Trunk
Tilting the rear seat forward completely
allows maximum loading volume.
Proceed as follows:
1. Completely lower the rear seat head
restraints.
2. Place the seatbelts so that they don't
impede the movement of the backrest
while tilting it.
3. From inside the luggage
compartment, use levers 1 and 2 to fold
down the backrests; these will fold down
forwards automatically. If necessary,
accompany the backrests during the
initial stage of tilting.
Repositioning The Backrests
Move the seatbelts to the side, making
sure that they are correctly extended and
not twisted, and that they are not
trapped behind the backrests of the
seats. Make sure the seatbelts are in the
front of the seatback and lift the
backrests, pushing them back until you
hear the locking click on both latch
mechanisms.
Warning!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
04066S0005EM
Rear Seat
04066S0007EM
Seat Release Levers
1 — Left Side Seat Release Lever
2 — Right Side Seat Release Lever
28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Center Backrest Section Tilting
The center backrest can be tilted forward
for a “Ski-PassThrough” feature from the
trunk. Before tilting the backrest, make
sure that the rear center seatbelt is not
fastened and that there are not any
objects in the middle part of the cushion.
Using the release strap, release the
center part of the backrest from its
housing and tilt it using the head
restraint.
Center Backrest Section Repositioning
Using the head restraint, lift the center
portion upwards, accompanying it during
its movement, and lightly push to make
sure that it is properly attached. Make
sure that the armrest is properly
attached by attempting to move it. If it is
not attached, repeat the operation.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce
the risk of injury by restricting head
movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so
that the top of the head restraint is
located above the top of your ear.
Warning!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be
reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Do not place items over the top of the
Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats,
seat covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of
a collision and could result in serious injury
or death.
Front Head Restraints (Adjustments)
The front head restraints may be
height-adjustable. To adjust them,
operate as follows:
Upward adjustment: Raise the head
restraint until it clicks into place.
Downward adjustment: Push the
adjustment button and push downward
on the head restraint to lower.
Warning!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
Note: To allow maximum visibility for the
driver, if the head restraints are not in
use, lower the head restraint all the way.
04066S0008EM
Center Backrest Section Tilting
29
Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments)
Warning!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
The height of the outboard head
restraints can be adjusted. The head
restraint of the center seat can only be
removed. The height cannot be adjusted.
For upward adjustment, pull up on the
head restraint until it clicks into place.
For downward adjustment, push in the
adjustment button and lower the head
restraint while holding the button to the
desired height.
Note: To allow maximum visibility for the
driver, if the head restraints are not in
use, lower the head restraint all the way.
Head Restraints (Removal)
To remove the head restraints, proceed
as follows:
1. Raise the head restraints to their
maximum height.
2. Push the adjustment button and the
release button at the side of the two
supports.
3. Remove the head restraints by pulling
them upwards.
To reinstall the head restraints, proceed
as follows:
1. Hold down both the adjustment
button and release button while placing
the head restraint post into the holes.
2. Then, reposition the head restraint to
the appropriate height for the
passengers.
Warning!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be
reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
04076S0002EM
Rear Head Restraint
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
Adjustments
This feature allows you to tilt the
steering column upward or downward. It
also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping
lever is located below the steering wheel
at the end of the steering column.
Warning!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
To Adjust The Position:
1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control
Handle down to the open position.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position.
3. Lock the desired position by pushing
the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle to
the closed position.
Warning!
It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any
after-market operation involving steering
system or steering column modifications
(e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that
could adversely affect performance. Doing
so could void the New Vehicle Limited
Warrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETY
PROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY, and also
result in the vehicle not meeting
type-approval requirements.
04086S0001EM
Steering Wheel Adjustment
1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
A — Open
B — Closed
31
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
While the engine is running, push the
heated steering wheel
button on the
instrument panel.
When the function is enabled, the
indicator on the button will illuminate.
Warning!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Electrochromic Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for
headlight glare from vehicles behind you.
The electrochromic mirror has a power
button to activate/deactivate the
automatic dimming/anti-glaring function.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
automatic dimming feature is
deactivated.
Outside Power Mirrors
Power Adjustment
The power mirrors can be adjusted with
the ignition ON.
Select the desired mirror using the power
mirror control.
To adjust the selected mirror, push the
knob in the direction desired.
Note: Once adjustment is complete,
rotate the knob to the neutral position to
prevent accidental movements.
Power Folding
With the power mirror control knob in the
neutral position, move it to the power
folding position. Move the knob again to
return the mirrors to the driving position.
If the power mirror control knob is moved
again during door mirror folding (from
closed to open position and vice versa),
the movement direction is reversed.
04086S0002EM
Heated Steering Wheel Button
04106S0002EM
Electrochromic Mirror Power Button
04106S0004EM
Power Mirror Control
1 — Power Mirror Control Knob
A — Left
B — Right
C — Power Folding Position
D — Neutral
32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Activation
Activating the central door locking
system from outside the vehicle
automatically folds the mirrors. The
mirrors return to the driving position
when the vehicle is then unlocked.
If the door mirrors were folded using the
power mirror control knob, they can only
be returned to the driving position by
rotating the knob again.
Note: The power folding operation can
be enabled only when the vehicle speed is
lower than 31 mph (50 km/h). They can
only be manually controlled up to that
speed.
Automatic Dimming Mirrors
Like the electrochromic mirror, an
automatic dimming feature is also
available on the outside rear view mirrors
to prevent glare. The automatic dimming
button is the same for all rear view
mirrors.
Warning!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Heated Mirrors
Push the rear defrost button in the
climate controls to activate the heated
mirrors.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located to the left
of the steering wheel on the instrument
panel. This switch controls the operation
of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, instrument panel
light dimming, interior lights and rear fog
lights.
In addition, there are buttons for parking
sensors deactivation and stop/start.
Refer to “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
04126S0001NA
Headlight Switch
1 — Parking Sensors Deactivation But-
ton
2 — Parking Light, Daylight Running
Lights, Headlight Switch
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
4 — Rear Fog Light Button
5 — Stop/Start Button
33
The exterior lights can be activated only
when the ignition is in the ON position,
except for the parking lights. Refer to
"Parking Lights" in this section for more
information.
The instrument panel and the various
controls on the dashboard will be
illuminated when the exterior lights are
turned on.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the
headlights on or off according to ambient
light levels.
Function Activation
From the O (off) position, turn the light
switch to the
(AUTO) position.
Note: The function can only operate with
the ignition position cycled to ON.
Function Deactivation
To deactivate the function, turn the light
switch to a position other than the
(AUTO) position.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
With the ignition cycled to ON, and the
light switch turned to the
position, if
the dusk sensor detects sufficient
external light, the Daytime Running
Lights will turn on automatically while the
other lights remain off.
If the turn signals are operated, the
brightness of the corresponding Daytime
Running Lights will be decreased as long
as the turn signals are on.
The DRL can be activated/deactivated
from the Information and Entertainment
System, by selecting the following
functions in sequence on the main MENU:
1. “Settings.”
2. “Lights.”
3. “Daytime Running Lights.”
Note: The Daytime Running Lights
cannot be deactivated in Canadian
markets.
Rear Fog Light
The rear fog light switch is integrated
with the headlight switch.
Push the
button to turn the rear fog
lights on/off.
The rear fog lights turn on only when the
headlights or parking lights are turned on.
The lights can be turned off by pushing
the
button again or by turning the
headlight switch to the O (off) position.
When the engine is stopped with the rear
fog lights on, they will remain off the next
time the engine is started.
Parking Lights
With the ignition in the STOP position,
turn the headlight switch to the
position to turn the parking lights on.
All of the parking lights will turn on for
eight minutes, and opening the door
activates an audible warning.
To leave only the lights on one side
(right/left) illuminated, you must move
the multifunction lever (located on the
left side of the steering wheel) to the side
that you want to remain on. With the
parking lights on, the
warning light on
the instrument panel will illuminate.
Note: Cycling the ignition to ON turns off
the parking lights, which were only
illuminated on one side.
Headlight Off Delay
The “Headlight Off Delay” function delays
the turning off of the headlights for a set
time when the ignition is cycled OFF.
The function can be activated from the
Information and Entertainment System
by selecting the following functions in
sequence on the main menu:
1. “Settings.”
2. “Lights.”
3. “Headlight Off Delay.”
The side lights and the headlights stay on
for a time that can be set between 30,
60, and 90 seconds.
Function Activation
With the headlights on, cycle the ignition
to STOP, the timer will then start.
Note: To activate this function, the
headlights must be deactivated within
two minutes after the ignition has been
cycled to STOP.
34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Function Deactivation
This function is deactivated by turning on
the headlights, the side lights, or by
cycling the ignition to ON.
Adaptive Frontlight System (AFS
Function) — If Equipped
This is a system combined with Xenon
headlights (Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp if
equipped) which directs the headlights
horizontally, and continuously and
automatically adapts them to the driving
conditions around bends or when
cornering.
The system directs the headlights to light
up the road in the best way, taking into
account the speed of the vehicle and the
bend or corner angle, as well as the speed
of steering.
The adaptive lights are automatically
activated when the vehicle is started.
High Beam Headlights
To activate the fixed high beam
headlights, push the multifunction lever,
located on the left side of the steering
wheel, towards the instrument panel. The
headlight switch must be turned to the
(AUTO) or (ON) position.
With high beam headlights on, the
High Beam Indicator on the
instrument panel will illuminate.
The high beam headlights are turned off
by pulling the lever to its original position.
The warning light/icon
will turn off in
the instrument panel when the headlights
are turned off.
Flashing The Headlights
Pulling the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel will activate the high
beam headlights manually. The lights will
remain on as long as the lever is held.
Once the lever is released, the lights will
resume the previous position.
Automatic High Beam Headlights — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlights
system provides increased forward
lighting at night by automating high beam
control through the use of a digital
camera mounted on the windshield. This
camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams
to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
This function is enabled with the
Information and Entertainment System,
and can only be activated with the light
switch turned to
(AUTO).
If the high beam headlights are on, the
blue icon/warning light
will illuminate
in the instrument panel.
When the speed is higher than 37 mph
(60 km/h) and the function is active, the
lights will turn off if the multifunction
lever is pushed again.
When the speed is lower than 15 mph
(25 km/h) and the function is active, the
function switches the high beam
headlights off.
If the high beam headlights are operated
quickly again (pushing the multifunction
lever towards the instrument panel), the
warning light/icon
will illuminate in the
instrument panel, and the high beam
headlights will turn on constantly until
the speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h).
When the speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is
exceeded again, the automatic
functioning is reactivated.
If the multifunction lever is pushed again
with the Automatic High Beam
Headlights activated, the Automatic High
Beam Headlights function deactivates.
04126S0020EM
Multifunction Lever
35
To deactivate the automatic headlight
function, rotate the headlight switch to
the
position.
Note: If the system recognizes heavy
traffic areas, the automatic functions
remain disabled independently of the
vehicle’s speed.
Turn Signals
To activate the turn signals function,
move the multifunction lever, located on
the left side of the steering wheel, up or
down until it reaches the detent. Moving
the lever upward flashes the right turn
signal and moving the lever downward
will flash the left turn signal.
The
or turn signal will blink on the
instrument panel.
The turn signals turn off automatically
when the vehicle is brought back onto a
straight course.
“Lane Change” Function
Tap the lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash five times.
Then, the turn signal (right or left) will
automatically turn off.
To turn off the flashing before the end of
the cycle, move the lever in the opposite
direction until the first click (about half
way).
Static Bending Light Function (SBL) —
If Equipped
The SBL function utilizes Light Emitting
Diodes (LEDs) in order to better
illuminate the street and increase the
light angle while turning. This function is
enabled by rotating the light switch to
position
or (AUTO). The SBL LEDs
activate when the speed is below 25 mph
(40 km/h).
This function can be activated/
deactivated on the Information and
Entertainment System by selecting the
following functions in sequence on the
main menu:
1. “Settings.”
2. “Lights.”
3. “Cornering Lights.”
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Front Map Reading Lights
The front map/reading and overhead
lights are mounted in the overhead
console. Each light can be turned on by
pushing the corresponding switch on the
console. These switches are backlit for
night time visibility. To turn the lights off,
push the switch a second time.
04136S0001EM
Overhead Console
1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch
2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch
3 — Overhead Lights Switch
4 — Front Map Reading Lights Switch
5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light
Switch
6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light
7 — Center Reading/Map Light
8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light
36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Note: Before getting out of the vehicle,
ensure that the overhead lights are off.
This will prevent the battery level from
being drained once the doors are closed.
If a light is left on accidently, the
overhead lights turn off automatically
approximately 15 minutes after the
engine has been turned OFF.
Overhead Light Timing
To assist getting in and out of the vehicle
at night or in poorly-lit areas, two timed
modes are available to keep the interior
lighting on after the engine is cycled OFF.
Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle
The overhead lights will illuminate as
follows:
For a few seconds when the doors are
unlocked.
For approximately three minutes when
one of the doors is opened.
For a few seconds when the doors are
locked.
Timing is interrupted when the ignition is
cycled to ON.
Exiting Overhead Light Timing
The overhead lights will turn off as
follows:
After all doors are closed upon
entering the vehicle, the three minute
timer will stop and a second timer will
start for the overhead lights. This timing
will end when the ignition is cycled to ON.
When the doors are locked (either with
key fob or with key inserted on driver’s
side door).
After 15 minutes to preserve the
battery.
Timing While Getting Out Of The
Vehicle
After cycling the ignition to STOP, the
overhead lights will turn on as follows:
For a few seconds after the engine
stops.
For approximately three minutes when
one of the doors is opened.
For a few seconds when the last door
is closed.
The timing ends automatically when the
doors are locked.
Vanity Mirror Lights
On the driver and passenger sun visor,
there is a light which illuminates the sun
visor mirror when folded down.
The courtesy light turns on automatically
by lifting the cover.
04136S0002EM
Sun Visor Mirror
1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover
37
Glove Compartment Light
This light turns on automatically when the
glove compartment is opened and turns
off when it is closed.
The light turns on and off regardless of
the ignition status.
Interior Ambient Lighting
The brightness of the interior lighting can
be adjusted via the Information and
Entertainment System.
To access the adjustment function, on the
main menu select the following items in
sequence:
1. "Settings."
2. "Interior Ambient Lighting."
3. "Lights."
The lights can be adjusted to seven
different levels of brightness.
Door Light
This vehicle is equipped with door
courtesy lamps that illuminate the entry
way for the driver or passenger when the
door is opened, and turns off when it is
closed.
The light turns on and off regardless of
the ignition status.
As part of the "Passive Entry" system,
another light can be found under each
exterior door handle.
04136S0003EM
Glove Compartment Light
04136S0007EM
Door Light
04136S0005EM
Exterior Door Handle Light
38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Overhead Light
The rear overhead lights are activated or
deactivated by two on/off switches
located within the lights on the ceiling
above the rear seats.
The light turns on when a door is opened.
Note: The light will turn off
automatically after a few minutes if a
door is left open. To turn it on again, open
another door or close and reopen the
same door.
Courtesy Trunk Lights
The trunk features two courtesy lights.
These courtesy lights turn on
automatically when the trunk is opened
and turn off when it is closed.
The courtesy lights will turn on and off
regardless of the ignition status.
Note: If the trunk is left open, the lights
will automatically turn off after
15 minutes to preserve battery life.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
With the daytime running lights or
headlights on, rotate the dimmer control
upward to increase the instrument panel
brightness and the control button icons.
Rotate the dimmer control downward to
decrease brightness.
04136S0004EM
Rear Overhead Light
1 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light
2 — Driver Rear Overhead Light
3 — Driver Rear Overhead Light Switch
4 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light
Switch
04136S0006B
Courtesy Trunk Lights
04126S0055EM
Dimmer Control
39
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Windshield Wiper Stalk
The windshield wiper stalk is located on
the right side of the steering wheel.
The windshield wipers will only operate
with the ignition cycled to ON.
Caution!
Turn the windshield wipers off when
driving through an automatic car wash.
Damage to the windshield wipers may result
if the wiper control is left in any position
other than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
“Park” position before turning off the
engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the
wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle
is restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the
windshield wiper control is turned off and
the blades cannot return to the off position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper/Washers
Operation: The switch on the wiper
stalk can be set to the following
positions:
Windshield Wiper Off.
Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing.
High Sensitivity Rain Sensing.
Low Continuous Wiper Speed.
High Continuous Wiper Speed.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotating the switch to the
position
activates the first (low) level continuous
speed of the windshield wipers in manual
mode.
Rotating the switch to the
position
activates the second (high) level
continuous speed of the windshield
wipers in manual mode.
Rain Sensors
Rotating the switch to the
position,
activates the first, less sensitive level of
the Rain Sensing function.
Rotating the switch to the
position,
activates the second, more sensitive
level of the Rain Sensing function. Refer
to “Rain Sensor” in this section for more
information on how this system
functions.
Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the stalk toward the steering wheel
to operate the windshield washer.
Keep the stalk pulled to activate both the
windshield washer jet and the windshield
wiper with a single movement. The wipers
and washers will continue to operate until
you let go of the stalk.
The windshield wiper stops working three
strokes after the stalk is released,
followed by a final stroke six seconds
later to complete the cycle.
04146S000118
Windshield Wiper Switch
40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist
Use this feature when weather
conditions make occasional usage of the
wipers necessary. Push the stalk upward
to the MIST position and release for a
single wiping cycle. This function is useful
to remove small deposits of dust from
the windshield or morning dew.
Note: This function does not activate the
windshield washer. To spray windshield
washer fluid onto the windshield, the
washing function must be used.
Warning!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You
might not see other vehicles or other
obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the
windshield during freezing weather, warm
the windshield with the defroster before and
during windshield washer use.
Rain Sensor
The Rain Sensor is located behind the
interior rear view mirror. This feature
senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for
the driver.
The feature is especially useful for road
splash or over spray from the windshield
washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to one of
four settings to activate this feature.
The sensor has an adjustment range that
varies progressively from wiper still (no
stroke) when the windshield is dry, to
wiper at continuous speed (fast
operation) with intense rain.
Activation
Rotating the wiper switch to position
or activates the rain sensor.
The activation of the rain sensor system
is done by tapping the wiper stalk
upwards while the switch is in the
or
position.
The variation in sensitivity during rain
sensor operation is also signaled by a
stroke of the wiper (command acquired
and implemented). This stroke is also
executed with the windshield dry.
If the windshield washer is used with the
rain sensor activated, the normal washing
cycle is performed, after which the rain
sensor resumes its normal automatic
operation.
Note: Keep the glass in the sensor area
clean.
Deactivation
Use the wiper switch or cycle the ignition
to STOP.
In the event of malfunction of the rain
sensor while it is active, the windshield
wiper operates intermittently at a speed
consistent with the sensitivity setting of
the rain sensor, whether or not there is
rain on the glass for as long as the sensor
failure is indicated on the display.
The sensor continues to operate and it is
possible to set the windshield wiper to
continuous mode
or .The failure
indication remains on for as long as the
sensor is active.
The rain sensor is able to recognize and
automatically adjust itself in the
presence of the following conditions:
Presence of dirt on the controlled
surface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.).
Presence of streaks of water caused
by the worn window wiper blades.
Difference between day and night.
04146S0002B
Rain Sensor
41
CLIMATE CONTROL
Passenger Compartment Air Vents
Side Air Vents
To adjust the position of the Side Air
Vents, move the Side Air Vent Adjuster
(2) in any direction.
Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2)
to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Side
Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close
the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise
will open the vent.
Central Air Vents
To adjust the position of the Central
Air Vents, move the Central Air Vent
Adjuster (2) up or down.
Rotate the Central Air Vent Air Flow
Adjuster (3) to adjust the air flow.
Rotating Central Air Vent Air Flow
Adjuster (3) up will open the vents,
allowing for maximum airflow. Rotating it
down will close the vents.
Rear Air Vents
To adjust the position of the Rear Air
Vents, move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster
(2) in any direction.
Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2)
to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Rear
Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close
the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise
will open the vent.
04156S0002EM
Side Air Vents
1 — Demister Air Vents
2 — Side Air Vent Adjuster
04156S0003EM
Central Air Vents
1 — Adjustable Central Air Vents
2 — Central Air Vent Adjuster
3 — Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster
4 — Windshield Front Defroster Vent
04156S0004EM
Rear Air Vents
1 — Adjustable Rear Air Vents
2 — Rear Air Vent Adjuster
42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System
Controls
Caution!
The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which does not pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage. Under no circumstances, use
R134a and R12 fluids, which are incompatible with the components of this system.
04156V0005EM
Automatic Climate Control System
1 — Driver Temperature Adjustment
Knob
6 — Rear Defrost Button 11 — Passenger Heated Seat Button —
If Equipped
2 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Auto-
matic Operation)
7 — Passenger Side Air Distribution
Selection Button
12 — Air Conditioning Button
3 — Driver Side Air Distribution Selec-
tion Button
8 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Au-
tomatic Operation)
13 — Steering Wheel Heater Button —
If Equipped
4 — Max Defrost Button 9 — PassengerTemperature Adjust-
ment Knob
14 — Driver Side Heated Seat Button
— If Equipped
5 — Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10 — SYNC Button (Set Temperature
Alignment) Driver/Passenger Side
15 — Air Recirculation Button
43
Description
The Automatic Dual Zone Climate
Control System adjusts the temperature
and air distribution independently
between the driver and passenger.
The system maintains the set
temperature inside the passenger
compartment and compensates for
outside temperature change.
Note: The reference temperature is 72
°F (22 °C) for optimal comfort
management.
The automatic setting will adjust the
following to maintain comfort within the
passenger compartment:
Air temperature from the driver/front
passenger side vents
Air distribution from the driver/front
passenger side vents
Fan speed (continuous variation of the
air flow)
Compressor variations (for
cooling/dehumidifying the air)
Air recirculation
The Climate Control System can also be
operated manually by using the buttons
and knobs on the faceplate.
Manual selections will override the
automatic settings, which are stored until
the AUTO button is pushed. If the system
intervenes for safety reasons, the
automatic setting will take control of the
system.
The below operations will not deactivate
the automatic (AUTO) function:
Air Recirculation activation/
deactivation
A/C activation/deactivation
SYNC function activation
Rear Window Defrost activation/
deactivation
When in AUTO mode, the vehicle’s
internal temperature is controlled
according to the set temperature.
The following can be manually set or
adjusted:
Driver/passenger air temperature
Blower speed (continuous variation)
Air distribution (seven positions for
driver and passenger)
A/C activation
Front Defroster
Air recirculation
Rear Defroster
System deactivation
Operating Mode
The Climate Control system can be
activated in different ways. It is
recommended to use the automatic
function. Push the AUTO button and set
the desired temperatures.
The automatic system adjusts the
temperature, quantity, and distribution
of air introduced into the passenger
compartment. It also controls air
recirculation and the activation of the air
conditioner.
At any time during automatic operation,
you can change the temperature, activate
or deactivate the Rear Defroster,
activate SYNC, activate or deactivate
the air conditioner, and activate or
deactivate air recirculation. The system
will automatically adjust to the new
settings.
Climate Control Display Settings
The Climate Control settings are visible
on the Information and Entertainment
System radio screen.
44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The display on the Information and
Entertainment System is a pop up
window (1), which is activated by pushing
the buttons or turning the knobs on the
Climate Control system. The indicator
lights located on the number of buttons
and knobs indicate that the selected
feature is on/off. If no operation is
performed for a predetermined time, the
pop-up will close on the display.
Air Temperature Adjustment
Rotate the driver or passenger
Temperature Adjustment Knob clockwise
for warmer temperatures or
counterclockwise for cooler
temperatures. The set temperatures are
shown on the Information and
Entertainment System.
Push the SYNC button to sync the driver
and passenger air temperatures.
Rotate the passenger Temperature
Adjustment Knob to cancel the SYNC
function. This will set a new passenger
side temperature.
Rotate the Temperature Adjustment
Knob fully clockwise to engage the HI
(maximum heating) setting or fully
counterclockwise to engage the LO
(maximum cooling) setting. To deactivate
these functions, rotate the Temperature
Adjustment Knob to the desired
temperature.
Rear passengers’ temperature is linked
to driver side selection.
Air Distribution Selection
Push the Air Distribution Selection
button on the faceplate to change the
mode of air distribution.
Air flow to the windshield and
demister window vents to
demist/defrost them.
Air flow at the central and side
dashboard vents to ventilate the
chest and the face.
Air flow to the front and rear floor
vents. This setting heats the
passenger compartment the
quickest.
Air flow distributed between the
floor vents (hotter air) and the
central and side dashboard vents
(cooler air). This air distribution
setting is useful on sunny days
during spring and autumn.
Air flow distributed between the
floor vents, windshield, and front
side window defrosting/demisting
vents. This distribution setting
warms the passenger compartment
while preventing the windows from
fogging up.
Air flow distribution between the
windshield demisting/defrosting
vents, and side/central dashboard
vents. This distribution setting
sends air to the windshield in sunny
conditions.
Air flow distribution to all vents on
the vehicle.
In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls
automatically manage the air
distribution. When set manually, the
respective symbols on the Information
and Entertainment System indicate the
air distribution setting.
0521128655US
1 — Climate Control Pop-up Display
45
Fan Speed Adjustment
Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase
or decrease the blower speed. The speed
is displayed with lighted indicators in the
Information and Entertainment System
display.
Maximum fan speed = all indicators
illuminated on the Information and
Entertainment System display
Minimum fan speed = one indicator
illuminated on the Information and
Entertainment System display
The fan can be turned off by rotating the
Blower Speed Knob counterclockwise to
the off position (all segments on the
Information and Entertainment System
display are turned off).
Note: To restore automatic control of
the fan speed, push the AUTO button.
AUTO Button
When the AUTO button is pushed
(indicator illuminated), the Climate
Control system automatically adjusts the
following settings:
Quantity and distribution of air flow in
the passenger compartment
The air conditioner
Air recirculation
Cancels any manual settings
Selecting the AUTO function illuminates
the indicator on the A/C button or
.
If air distribution or the fan speed is
manual adjusted, the AUTO button
indicator turns off to indicate that the
Climate Control system is no longer in
AUTO mode.
After a manual adjustment, push the
AUTO button to resume the automatic
system.
SYNC Button
Push the SYNC button (indicator
illuminated) to sync the passenger side
air temperature with the driver side air
temperature.
This function makes temperature
regulation easier when the driver is
traveling alone.
Turn the passenger Temperature
Adjustment Knob or push the passenger
side Air Distribution Selection Button to
change the passenger side air
temperature and return to separate air
temperature management.
Air Recirculation And Air Quality
System (AQS)
Air Recirculation is managed according to
the following operating mode:
Automatic engagement: indicator is
illuminated above the “A” on the Air
Recirculation Button
Forced activation (air circulation
always activated): indicator illuminated
above the
icon on the Air
Recirculation Button
Forced deactivation (air recirculation
always off with intake of outside air):
both indicators not illuminated on the Air
Recirculation Button
The three operating conditions are
obtained by pushing the Air Recirculation
Button
in sequence.
Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS)
Function — If Equipped
When the automatic recirculation
function is selected, the AQS function
automatically activates internal air
recirculation when the outside air is
polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels).
At low external temperatures or in high
humidity, the automatic function turns
off to avoid fogging up the windows. The
user can select the function again by
pushing the Air Recirculation Button.
In automatic operation, air recirculation
will be controlled by the system
according to outside environmental
conditions.
46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Note:
With the AQS function active and
after the internal air recirculation
system has been functioning for a set
amount of time, the Climate Control
System enables air intake to cycle the
air in the passenger compartment for a
set time. The AQS function is disabled
during the air changes.
The engagement of the recirculation
system makes it possible to reach the
required heating or cooling conditions
faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use
it on rainy/cold days as it can increase
the possibility of the windows fogging.
When the outside temperature is low,
recirculation is forced off to prevent the
windows from fogging up.
A/C Compressor
Push the A/C button to activate or
deactivate the A/C compressor (indicator
illuminated when activated). The A/C
compressor will remain off even after the
engine has stopped.
When the A/C compressor is turned off,
the system deactivates air recirculation
to prevent the windows from fogging up.
If the climate control system can
maintain the temperature, with the A/C
turned off, the AUTO feature will remain
on and the AUTO button indicator light
will not switch off.
To restore automatic control of the A/C
compressor, push the A/C button or the
AUTO button. With the A/C compressor
off, the air speed can be set manually
using the Air Speed Adjustment Knob.
When the A/C compressor is on, and the
engine is running, air speed cannot be
lower than the minimum speed (only one
indicator light is lit).
Note: When the A/C is off the Climate
Control system can not produce air that
is colder than the current outside
temperature. Under certain
environmental conditions, windows could
fog up rapidly, since the air is not
dehumidified.
Front Defroster And MAX-DEF
Function
Push the Front Defroster button
(indicator illuminated) to defrost the
windshield and side windows.
While in MAX-DEF function, the air
conditioner will:
Activate the air conditioner
compressor when the weather allows
Turn air recirculation off
Set the maximum air temperature (HI)
on both the driver and passenger side
Activate a blower speed based on the
temperature of the engine coolant
Adjust the air flow towards the
windshield and front side windows
Activate the Rear Window Defroster
Display the fan speed (indicators
illuminated) and current air distribution
setting
Note: The MAX-DEF function remains
active for approximately three minutes
once the engine coolant reaches the
proper temperature.
When the function is on, AUTO mode will
deactivate. The only manual operations
possible are adjusting blower speed and
turning off the Rear Window Defroster.
Pushing the
button switches off the
MAX-DEF function.
Rear Defroster
Push the Rear Defroster button to
activate (indicators illuminated) the Rear
Defroster.
The Rear Defroster will turn off after
20 minutes or once the engine is turned
off. To reactive the Rear Defroster, push
the Rear Defroster
button.
Note: To avoid damage, do not apply
stickers over the interior heating
filaments of the Rear Defroster.
47
Humidity Sensor
The Humidity Sensor helps to prevent the
windows from fogging up. The AUTO
function (indicator illuminated) must be
on for the Humidity Sensor to function.
When outside temperature is low, the
system may turn the compressor on and
turn air recirculation off for safer driving.
Switching Off/On The Climate Control
System
Switching Off The Climate Control
System
Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob
completely counterclockwise to turn off
the Climate Control System.
With the air conditioner off:
Air recirculation is on
The A/C compressor is off
The fan is off
The heated rear window can be
activated/deactivated
Note: The climate control system stores
the previously set temperatures and
resumes operation when any button on
the system is pushed.
Switching On The Climate Control
System
To switch the climate control system on
in automatic mode, push the AUTO
button.
Stop/Start
The climate control system manages the
Stop/Start system. Stop/Start has the
engine shut off when vehicle speed is
0 mph (0 km/h) to maintain comfort
within the vehicle.
Stop/Start will deactivate in the
following scenarios:
The climate control system is in AUTO
mode (indicator illuminated), and the
vehicle has yet to reach the set
temperature
The climate control system is in LO
maximum cooling
The climate control system is in HI
maximum heating
The climate control system is in the
MAX-DEF status
When the Stop/Start system is active,
the engine will restart if the inside
temperature changes significantly, or if
the LO setting, or MAX-DEF setting, is
activated.
With Stop/Start system on, air flow is
reduced to keep the compartment
comfort conditions for longer.
Until the temperature drastically
changes within the cabin, the climate
control system will continue to maintain
the temperature while the engine is off.
By deactivating the Stop/Start system
with the
button located on the
dashboard, the climate control system
will take priority over the engine shutting
off.
Note:
In harsh climate conditions, limit the
use of the Stop/Start system to prevent
the compressor from continuously
switching on and off. This will cause
rapid misting of the windows and the
accumulation of humidity in the
passenger compartment.
When the Stop/Start system is on,
the climate control system will always
take air in from outside, reducing the
probability of the windows fogging up.
Additional Heater — If Equipped
Note: The additional heater
automatically operates if the outside
temperature and engine coolant
temperature are low. The heater will not
operate if battery voltage is low.
System Maintenance
In winter, the Climate Control System
must be turned on at least once a month
for approximately ten minutes.
Have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer before the summer.
48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
The power window switches work with
the ignition in the ON position and for
three minutes after the ignition has been
placed in the STOP position. When one of
the front doors is opened, this operation
is disabled.
Driver Side Front Door Controls
The switches are located on the door
panel trim. All windows can be controlled
from the driver side door panel.
Window Opening
Push the buttons to open the desired
window.
Each button has two position steps. Push
gently (first position step) for manual
"burst" window travel, while pushing the
same button harder (second position
step) activates "continuous automatic"
operation.
If the button is pushed again, the window
will stop in the desired position.
Window Closing
Pull the window switch up to move the
window upward. Hold the switch for at
least half of a second and the window will
go up automatically.
To stop the window during Auto-Up
operation, push or pull the window switch
again.
Passenger Side Front Door/Rear Door
Controls
There are single window controls on the
passenger and rear door trim panels
which operate the door windows.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection
The vehicle may be equipped with an
anti-pinch safety device for closing the
windows.
If the safety system senses any obstacle
while the window is closing, it will stop
the window’s movement and reverse it,
depending on its position.
This device is also useful if the windows
are activated accidentally by children
inside the vehicle.
The anti-pinch safety function is
activated both during the manual and the
automatic operation of the window.
When the anti-pinch system is activated,
the window closing is immediately
interrupted. Then the window closing is
automatically reversed and the window
lowers by about eight inches (20 cm) in
relation to the first stop position. The
window cannot be operated during this
time.
Note: In the event of an error, or if the
anti-pinch protection is activated three
consecutive times, the automatic closing
operation of the window will be
deactivated. In order to restore the
correct operation of the system, the
window must be lowered.
Power Window System Initialization
If power supply is interrupted, the
electric window automatic operation
must be reinitialized.
To perform the initialization procedure,
which must be done on each door with the
doors closed, manually fully close the
window to be initialized.
04166S0001EM
Power Window Switches
1 — Front Left
Window Switch
4 — Window
Lockout Switch
2 — Front Right
Window Switch
5 — Rear Left
Window Switch
3 — Rear Right
Window Switch
49
POWER SUNROOF — IF
EQUIPPED
Power Sunroof
The power sunroof consists of two glass
panels (the front one is power and the
rear one fixed) and is fitted with a power
sunshade in the front, as well as a
manually operated sunshade in the rear.
Operation of the sunroof is only possible
with the ignition cycled to the ON
position. Refer to “Ignition” in this
chapter for further information.
The sunroof has three preset positions:
Fully closed.
Comfort (intermediate opening).
Fully open.
Note: You cannot have the sunshade
closed when the sunroof is open.
Warning!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with keyless ignition in the
ON mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of
being thrown from a vehicle with an open
sunroof. You could also be seriously injured
or killed. Always fasten your seat belt
properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Opening
To open the sunroof’s front panel, push
the open/close button toward the rear of
the vehicle to open to the comfort
position (half way). Pushing the button a
second time will open to the fully open
position.
The automatic motion can be interrupted
in any position by pushing the open/close
button again.
Caution!
Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack or
crossbars are fitted. Do not open the sun
roof if there is snow or ice on it: you may
damage it.
04186S0001EM
Sunroof And Power Shade Buttons
1 — Power Shade Open/Close
2 — Open/Close Button
3 — Vent Open/Close
50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing
From the fully open position, push the
open/close button toward the front of
the vehicle. The roof will close
completely.
The automatic motion can be interrupted
in any position by pushing the open/close
button again.
Vent Opening
To bring the roof into vent position, push
and release the vent button.
This type of vent opening can be
activated regardless of the position of
the sunroof. When starting with the roof
in the closed position, pushing the vent
button automatically causes the sunroof
to open to the vent position. If the roof is
already open, the button must be held
until the roof reaches the vent-opening
position.
Pushing vent button again during
automatic movement of the roof will stop
it.
Sun Shade Movement
The front sunshade is power operated.
Push the Power Shade open/close button
toward the rear of the vehicle to open the
front sun shade to the three quarter open
position. Pushing the button a second
time will open the sunshade completely.
Push the Power Shade open/close button
toward the front of the vehicle to close
the sun shade.
The automatic motion can be interrupted
in any position by pushing the Power
Shade on/off button again.
To open the rear sunshade, pull sunshade
manually toward the rear of the vehicle.
Pinch Protect Feature
The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety
system capable of detecting the
presence of an obstacle during the
closing movement. If an obstacle is
detected, the system intervenes and the
movement of the sunroof is immediately
reversed into opening.
Initialization Procedure
Automatic operation of the sunroof must
be initialized again in case of faulty
sunroof operation. It may also be
necessary to initialize the sunroof after
the vehicle’s battery as been
disconnected and then reconnected.
Proceed as follows:
1. Push the open/close button to bring
the roof into the completely closed
position.
2. Cycle the ignition to the STOP
position and wait at least ten seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the AVV position.
Refer to “Ignition” in this chapter for
further information.
4. Hold the open/close button down for
at least ten seconds. You should then
hear the mechanical stop of the roof
motor.
5. Within five seconds, hold the
open/close button down. The roof will
perform a complete automatic opening
and closing cycle (to indicate that the
initialization procedure has been
successful). If this does not occur, the
procedure must be restarted from the
beginning.
51
HOOD
Opening
To open the hood, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the release lever located on the
driver’s side kick panel.
2. Go to the outside of the vehicle and
position yourself in front of the grille.
3. Lift the hood slightly.
4. Move the under-hood latch from right
to left to release the hood.
5. Raise the hood completely. The
operation is assisted by the addition of
two gas props which hold it in the open
position.
Note:
Do not tamper with the props and
assist the hood while lifting it.
Use both hands to lift the hood.
Before lifting, check that the windshield
wiper arms are not raised from the
windshield or in operation, that the
vehicle is stationary and that the electric
park brake is engaged.
Closing
To close, lower the hood to
approximately 16 inches (40 cm) from
the engine compartment then let it drop.
Make sure that the hood is completely
closed and fully latched. Do this by trying
to open it. If it is not perfectly closed, do
not try to push the hood lid down, but
open it and repeat the procedure.
Note: Always check that the hood is
closed correctly to prevent it from
opening while the vehicle is travelling.
Since the hood is equipped with a double
locking system, one for each side, you
must check that it is closed on both its
side ends.
Warning!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
04196S0001EM
Hood Release Lever
04196S0002B
Release Hood Latch To The Left
52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK
The trunk unlocking is electrically
operated and is deactivated when the
vehicle is in motion.
Opening
Opening From The Outside
When unlocked, the trunk lid can be
opened from outside the vehicle using
the exterior trunk lid release button
located between the plate lights. Push
the button until you hear a “click.” The
trunk lid can also be opened by quickly
pushing the exterior trunk lid release
button on the key fob twice.
The turn signal indicators will blink and
the interior lights will turn on when the
trunk lid is opened. They turn off
automatically when the trunk lid is
closed.
The lights turn off automatically after a
few minutes if the trunk lid is left open.
Opening From The Inside
When unlocked, the trunk lid can be
opened from inside the vehicle using the
interior trunk lid release button, located
under the dashboard near the engine
hood opening lever. Push the trunk lid
release button until you hear a “click.”
Trunk Lid Emergency Opening
A lever can be found in the trunk lid over
the lock to allow opening from the inside.
Pull the lever in the direction indicated by
the arrow to open the trunk lid. The lever
can be seen in the dark.
Closing
Grip one of the handles and lower the
trunk lid until it clicks.
Note:
It will not be possible to open the
trunk lid with a key or by pushing the
button in the passenger compartment
when the battery is disconnected. So,
always position the manual trunk lid
opening strap on the trunk lid lock
before disconnecting the battery. Refer
to “Storing The Vehicle” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the procedure.
04056S0005EM
Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button
04206S0002EM
Interior Trunk Lid Release Button
04206S0006EM
Emergency Release Button
04206S0003EM
Trunk Lid Interior Handles
53
Trunk Initialization
Note: If the battery is disconnected or
the protection fuse blows, the trunk lid
opening/closing mechanism must be
re-initialized as follows:
1. Close all the doors and the trunk lid.
2.
Push the lock button on the remote
control.
3. Push the unlock button on the remote
control.
Trunk Specifications
Rear Cargo Tie–Downs — If Equipped
There are four hooks inside the trunk for
attaching the cargo net or cables which
can safely secure the cargo.
Note: Do not apply a load greater than
22 lbs (10 kg) on a single hook.
Cargo Net — If Equipped
This is useful for correctly arranging the
cargo and/or for transporting light materials.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment proceed
as follows:
1. If equipped with a lock, unlock the
glove compartment by placing the
emergency key in the lock on the handle.
2. Pull handle to open the glove
compartment.
When the glove compartment is opened,
a light turns on to illuminate the inside of
the compartment.
Note: Do not insert large objects that
will prevent the glove compartment from
closing completely. Always make sure
that the glove compartment is
completely closed when driving.
Sun Visors
The sun visors are located at the sides of
the interior rear view mirror. They can be
adjusted forward and toward the side
window.
To direct the visor toward the side
window, detach the visor from the
interior rear view mirror side hook and
turn it towards the side window.
From this position, the sun visor can also
be extended toward to rear of the vehicle
for additional blockage of sunlight.
Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted on
the back of the sun visors and can be
used even in poor light conditions.
Note: A rear facing child restraint
system should never be fitted in the front
passenger seat. Always comply with the
instructions on the sun visor. Refer to
"Child Restraints" in "Safety" for more
information.
04206S0005EM
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
04246S0001EM
Opening The Glove Compartment
04246S0002EM
Rotate Sun Visor Toward Passenger
Window
54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Homelink
Description
Homelink is a fixed system installed on
the vehicle. It can sync up to three
different devices that activate garage
doors, gates, lighting systems, and home
or office alarm systems.
Programming
Warning!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon
monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your
vehicle in the garage while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
Note: Without starting the engine,
activate the handbrake and place the
ignition in the ON position.
The following operation will delete the
manufacture’s standard codes and does
not need to be repeated during the
subsequent button programming:
Push and hold the outer buttons (1 and
3). After about ten seconds, the lighted
indicators will start to flash. Release both
buttons.
Note: Follow the steps below to begin
programming your remote control to one
of the HomeLink buttons:
1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink
button (1, 2 or 3). When the HomeLink
indicator begins to flash slowly, move the
portable remote control one to three
inches from the HomeLink system
(keeping the programmable button
pushed down).
2. If the indicator does not begin to flash
quickly, change the distance between the
HomeLink and the portable remote
control and try the procedure again.
3. The HomeLink indicator flashes, first
slowly and then quickly. When the
indicator starts to flash quickly, release
both buttons.
Using The Homelink System
The HomeLink system activates the
garage door or gate motor, just like the
portable remote control. The car must be
within the range of the garage door and
the ignition must be in the ON position.
Push the programmed button (1, 2 or 3).
While the signal is being transmitted, the
indicator is lit and the system (garage
door, gate, etc.) will respond.
If the HomeLink system does not
operate, the original portable remote
control may be equipped with an
alternative code (refer to “Alternative
Code Synchronization”).
If necessary, the original remote control
can still be used to operate the system.
04246S0006NA
Garage Door Opener (Homelink)
Buttons
1 — Homelink Button 1
2 — Homelink Button 2
3 — Homelink Button 3
4 — Homelink Indicator
55
Alternative Code Synchronization
To check whether the garage door or gate
motor has an alternative code, proceed
as follows:
1. Read the garage door or gate motor
manufacturer manual.
2. The portable remote control seems to
have programmed to the HomeLink
system, but the garage door or gate can
be neither opened or closed.
3. Push the programmed button and
keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). With an
alternative code system, the indicator
flashes briefly, and then remains off for
two seconds. This sequence is repeated
for 20 seconds.
Warning!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon
monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your
vehicle in the garage while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
Note: To program Homelink using an
Alternative Code, the car must be within
range of the garage door. Activate the
handbrake and turn the ignition to ON,
without starting the engine.
Proceed as follows:
1. Locate the “Learn” or “Train” button on
the garage door or gate motor. The color
and position may vary depending on the
manufacturer (consult the garage door or
gate manual). Push the “Learn” or “Train”
button (this normally activates the
setting warning light).
2. Push the desired HomeLink button (1,
2 or 3). When the HomeLink indicator
begins to flash slowly, move the portable
remote control one to three inches from
the HomeLink system (keeping the
programmable button pushed down).
3. Within 30 seconds, push the
programmed key (1, 2 or 3) and release it.
Push the programmed button a second
time and release it to conclude the
operation. For some motors, the
operation will probably have to be
repeated a third time to end the setting.
The motor should now be capable of
recognizing the signal transmitted by
HomeLink and then open/close the door
or gate.
Programming A Single Key
It is possible to program another original
remote control on an already
programmed HomeLink key by canceling
the previously stored frequency.
Warning!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon
monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your
vehicle in the garage while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,
on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
Note: Activate the handbrake and place
the ignition to ON without starting the
engine.
56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Proceed as follows:
1. Push the desired HomeLink button
and keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). Do not
release the button until the last
operation has been performed.
2. When the HomeLink indicator begins
to flash slowly, move the portable remote
control 1 to 3 inches from the system
(keeping the programmable button
pressed down).
If the indicator does not begin to flash
quickly, change the distance between the
HomeLink and the portable remote
control and try the procedure again.
The HomeLink indicator flashes, first
slowly and then quickly. When the
indicator starts to flash quickly, release
both buttons on the remote control.
The system previously programmed to
HomeLink has now been deleted and the
new system is ready to use. This does not
affect the other two HomeLink buttons in
any way.
Deleting Programmed Keys
It is recommended to delete HomeLink
programming before selling the car.
All three keys are deleted
simultaneously.
Proceed as follows:
1. Push and hold the outer buttons
(1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the
indicator will start to flash.
2. Release both keys.
Technical Information For After Sales
Service
If you are unable to set up HomeLink
successfully after following the above
instructions, contact After Sales Service
(HomeLink free hotline number
1-800-355-3515 ) with the following
information:
Vehicle make and model, including
manufacturing year and country of
purchase;
Make, model, age and frequency of use
of the original portable remote control (if
known).
General Information
The following regulatory statement
applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)
devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Center Console
The center console storage compartment
is located between the front seats.
To access the center console storage, lift
the upper part of the center console as
shown below.
04246S0004EM
Center Console
57
Warning!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
Cupholder
Two cupholders are available in the
center console.
To access the cupholders, slide the cover
forward. To close the compartment, push
the cover and it will close automatically.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
The following systems are used for
reducing engine emissions:
Catalytic Converter
Oxygen Sensors
Evaporation Control System
04246S0005EM
Cupholders In Center Console
1— Cover
58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This section gives you all the information
you need to understand and use
the instrument panel correctly.
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . .60
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .62
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON
THE INSTRUMENT PANEL........67
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . . .89
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ......89
59
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
Instrument Cluster
1. Tachometer
2. Digital Engine Oil Temperature Gauge With Overheating Warning Light
3. Instrument Cluster Display
4. Digital Fuel Level Gauge (The Triangle On The Left Side Of The Symbol Indicates The Fuel Door Location)
5. Speedometer (Speed Indicator)
05026S0005EM
Instrument Cluster
60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tachometer
The Tachometer indicates the engine
Revolutions Per Minute (Giri).
Adjusting Instrument Panel Lighting
(Brightness Sensor)
Inside the Tachometer there is a light
sensor capable of detecting light and
adjusting the brightness of the
instrument panel and the Information and
Entertainment System display.
Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
The digital indicator monitors the
temperature of the engine oil and starts
supplying indications when the oil
temperature reaches approximately
122° F (50°C).
Under normal usage, the temperature
should remain around the middle of the
digital scale according to the working
conditions.
The
warning light will turn on to signal
the excessive increase of the engine oil
temperature.
In the event of excessive engine oil
temperature, stop the engine
immediately and contact an authorized
dealer.
Fuel Level Gauge
The digital fuel gauge monitors the
amount of fuel in the tank.
When the
warning light turns on, a
message is displayed, and a chime is
sound when 2.38 Gallons (9.0 L) of fuel
are left in the tank.
Note: If the low fuel warning light turns
on, refuel the vehicle at your nearest fuel
station.
Caution!
Do not travel with the fuel tank almost
empty: any gaps in fuel supply could damage
the catalytic converter.
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed in miles per hour and/or kilometers
per hour (mph/km/h).
61
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Instrument Cluster Display Description
This vehicle is equipped with a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster will display
the vehicle mileage for a few seconds.
Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display
During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings and failure
indications.
05036S0001QV
Instrument Cluster Display
62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reconfigurable Display Items
1. Headlight Warning Lights
Displays the headlight warning light for
either of the following active modes:
Headlights
Automatic Headlights
2. Gear Selector Information
Displays the following information
controlled by the gear selector function:
P = PARK
R = REVERSE
N = NEUTRAL
D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed)
AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear in
manual (sequential) driving mode –
shifting to lower gear in sequential
driving mode
3. Forward Collision, Lane Departure,
Cruise Control
Displays operations for the following
modes:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — If
Equipped
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If
Equipped
Cruise Control (CC) or Active Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped
4. Speed Limit Warning Light
Shows information regarding the Speed
Limiter function.
5. Compass
6. Reconfigurable Main Area
Can display the following screens:
Home
Trip A
Trip B (can be activated/deactivated
through the Information and
Entertainment System)
Performance
The screens can be selected, on rotation,
by pushing the MENU selection button on
the windshield wiper stalk.
Depending on the driving mode chosen
using the Alfa DNA (Dynamic, Natural,
and Advanced Efficiency, the screens can
be graphically different. Navigation
instructions and call information can be
set and displayed in the Information and
Entertainment System.
Home
The parameters shown on the display, for
the modes: Dynamic, Natural and
Advanced Efficiency are:
Time
Outside Temperature
Current Speed (shown if the repeat
modes of the Phone and Navigation
functions are not active)
Range
05036S0002EM
MENU Selection/Reset Button
05036S0004NA
Instrument Cluster Display
63
Trip A And B
For all driving modes (Dynamic, Natural,
and Advanced Efficiency) and with the
ignition device ON, the "Trip computer"
can be used to display the measurements
regarding the operating state of the
vehicle. This function is characterized by
two separate records, called “Trip A” and
“Trip B” (the latter can be deactivated by
Information and Entertainment System),
where the “complete missions” (journeys)
are recorded in a reciprocally
independent manner.
“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display
the values relating to:
Distance travelled
Average fuel consumption
Average speed
Active trip
Fuel consumption indicator
To reset the values, press and hold down
the button on the windshield wiper stalk.
Performance
The displayed parameters differ
according to the active mode. The modes
which can be selected using the Alfa DNA
system are:
Natural
The screen graphically reproduces some
parameters closely linked to the
efficiency of the driving style, with a view
to limiting consumption.
05036S0055NA
Instrument Cluster Display
05036S0007NA
Instrument Cluster Display
05036S0009NA
Efficiency Consumption Graph
64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Advanced Efficiency
The three central icons on the screen
indicate the effectiveness of the driving
style, linked to the following parameters:
acceleration, deceleration and gear
shifts, with a view to limiting
consumption. The bar below the icons
shows current consumption and the
green line represents the optimal area.
The globe lights up gradually according to
lower consumption.
Dynamic
The displayed parameters are related to
vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the
trend of the longitudinal/lateral
accelerations (G-meter information),
considering gravity acceleration as a
reference unit.
Lateral acceleration peaks are also
indicated.
7. Vehicle Range
Indicates the miles left before the fuel
tank is empty.
Displays the position by indicating the
cardinal direction.
8. Failure Warning Lights
Area dedicated to displaying failures, the
following symbols could be displayed on
rotation:
Low criticality symbols (yellow amber)
High criticality symbols (red)
9. Odometer
Indicates the total miles travelled.
U.S. Federal regulations require that
upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the
seller certify to the purchaser the correct
mileage that the vehicle has been driven.
If your odometer needs to be repaired or
serviced, the repair technician should
leave the odometer reading the same as
it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be
set at zero, and a sticker must be placed
in the door jamb stating what the mileage
was before the repair or service. It is a
good idea for you to make a record of the
odometer reading before the
repair/service, so that you can be sure
that it is properly reset, or that the door
jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
05036S0011NA
Dynamic Driving Style
05036S0013NA
Acceleration Gauge
65
Customer Programmable Settings
Multiple settings can be programmed by
the user using the Information and
Entertainment System. This section
describes only the basic settings:
Units & Language
Time & Date
Cluster
To access the settings list in the
Information and Entertainment System,
proceed as follows:
Press the MENU button to access the
main menu.
Select “Settings” from the main menu
using the Rotary Knob.
Units & Language
The following settings can be modified
under the “Units & Language” menu:
Units: select US, metric, or custom.
The custom option allows for individual
selection of the unit measures
Language: change the language of the
system
Restore Settings: restores the factory
settings
To access and change the setting, turn
and push the Rotary Pad.
Clock & Date
The following settings can be modified
under the “Clock & Date” menu:
Sync With GPS Time: activates or
deactivates the clock synchronization
through the GPS. If the function is
deactivated, the options Set Time and
Set Date are enabled
Set Time: set the time manually
Time Format: set the time format to
either a 12-hour and a 24-hour clock
Set Date: set the date manually
Restore Settings: restores the factory
settings
To access and change the setting, turn
and push the Rotary Pad.
05036S0015EM
Information And Entertainment System
05036S0040EM
MENU button
0401135760US
Units & Language Menu
0401135761US
Clock & Date Menu
66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Cluster
The following settings can be modified
under the “Cluster” menu:
Warning Buzzer Volume: set the
volume of the warning buzzer
Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip
function
Phone Repeat: activate or deactivate
repeating the Phone function screens on
the instrument cluster display
Restore Settings: restores the factory
settings
To access and change the setting, turn
and push the Rotary Pad.
WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL
The following pages consist of warning
lights and messages.
Note:
The warning light turns on together
with a dedicated message and/or chime
when applicable. These indications are
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or
alternative to the information contained
in the Owner’s Manual, which you are
advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this
section in the event of a failure
indication.
The failure indicators appearing on
the display are divided into two
categories: very serious and less serious
faults. Serious faults are indicated by a
repeated and prolonged warning "cycle.”
Less serious faults are indicated by a
warning "cycle" with a shorter duration.
You can stop the warning cycle in both
cases by pushing the button located on
the windshield wiper stalk. The
instrument panel warning light will stay
on until the cause of the failure is
eliminated.
0401135762US
Instrument Cluster Display Menu
67
Red Warning Lights
Warning Light What It Means What To Do
INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE
ON
This light monitors various brake functions, including
brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the
brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake
Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately four seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer to
have the system checked as soon as possible.
Release the electric park brake, then check that the
warning light has turned off.
If the warning light stays on, contact an authorized dealer.
ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD)
FAILURE
The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and
(amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates
either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is
not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly
lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly.
Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to
have the system inspected immediately.
68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Warning Light What It Means What To Do
AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until
the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.
SEAT BELT REMINDER WARNING LIGHT
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position,
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound
and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or
front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously
and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Safety” for further information.
Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle.
OIL TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. If the problem persists, contact an authorized
dealer.
Warning!
The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any
faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.
If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the
display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a
lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.
69
Amber Warning Lights
Warning
Light
What It Means What To Do
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHT
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the
Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake indicator light is not
on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as
soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If
the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHT
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to
indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended
value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above,
the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire
in sequence.
Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed no higher
then 50 mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorized dealer to have
the tire repaired.
70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than
the size indicated on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to
ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
Caution!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation
or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealership to have your sensor function
checked.
71
Warning Light What It Means What To Do
Tire Pressure Low
The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire
pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that
slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire
duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
In any situation in which the message on the display is "See
Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to “Auxiliary Driving
Systems” in “Safety,” strictly complying with the
indications that you find there.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATOR
LIGHT
When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light
illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is
started.
ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the system is
indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it indicates
that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.
ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turn off,
or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found
in the ESC system.
In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of the
indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure.
72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Warning Light What It Means What To Do
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT
When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light
illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is
started.
The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some active
safety systems have been partially or totally deactivated.
For further details about the active safety systems, refer
to “Active Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When the active
safety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns
off.
REAR FOG LIGHT
The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is
activated.
ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL)
In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as soon as
the engine is started.
The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the
traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws
and regulations of the country where you are driving.
Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling
at moderate speed but without demanding excessive
effort from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the
vehicle with the indicator light on constantly may cause
damage. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Caution!
If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versions
together with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
73
Warning Light What It Means What To Do
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) — IF
EQUIPPED
This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal
collision alarm function is not enabled.
Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE
The indicator light (or the symbol in the display)
illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left
in the tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
Warning!
If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer.
74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Indicator light What It Means What To Do
PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHT
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
Headlight Off Delay
This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30,
60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the
STOP position.
LEFTTURN SIGNAL
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash
independently for the left turn signal as selected, as well
as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as
selected when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with
the right directional arrow when the hazard warning light
button is pushed.
RIGHTTURN SIGNAL
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash
independently for the right turn signal as selected, as well
as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as
selected when the multifunction lever is moved up (right).
This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left
directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is
pushed.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high
beam headlights are activated.
75
Blue Telltale Indicator Light
Indicator Light What It Means What To Do
HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on.
Push the multifunction control lever away from you to
switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever a
second time to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on,
“flash to pass” scenario.
Red Symbols
Symbol What It Means What To Do
LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the
telltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound
when this telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicle
until the cause is corrected. This telltale does not indicate
how much oil is in the engine.
Note:
Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved.
The turning on of the telltale does not indicate the
amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checked on
the display upon entering the vehicle and also by
activating the "Oil level" function on the Information and
Entertainment System.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Caution!
If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.
Symbol What It Means What To Do
ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE TOO HIGH
The telltale lights up when the engine has overheated.
In normal driving conditions: stop the car, turn off the
engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is
not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine
to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, fill
with coolant and check that the level is between the MIN
and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check visually
for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if the
telltale comes on when the engine is started again.
If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in
high-performance driving): slow down and, if the warning
light stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for 2 or 3 minutes
with the engine running and slightly accelerated to
facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engine
off. Check that the coolant level is correct as described
above.
77
Symbol What It Means What To Do
POWER STEERING FAILURE
If the telltale remains on, you could not have steering
assistance and the effort required to operate the steering
wheel could be increased; steering is, however, possible.
Note:
After the battery is disconnected, the steering wheel must
be initialized. The Power Steering Failure light on the
instrument panel will illuminate to indicate this. To carry
out this procedure, simply turn the steering wheel all the
way from one end to the other, and then turn in back to the
central position.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
DOOR OPEN
The telltale turns on when one or more doors are not
completely shut. An acoustic signal is activated with the
doors open and the car moving.
Close the doors properly.
HOOD CAP NOTPROPERLY SHUT
The telltale turns on when the hood cap is not properly
closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an
open hood cap appears on the display.
A buzzer is heard when the hood cap is open and the
vehicle is moving.
Close the hood properly.
TRUNK LID NOTPROPERLY SHUT
The telltale turns on when the trunk lid is not properly
closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an
open trunk lid appears on the display.
A buzzer is heard when the trunk lid is open and the vehicle
is moving.
Close the trunk lid properly.
78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol What It Means What To Do
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILURE
The telltale turns on, together with a buzzer warning, to
indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Caution!
Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely
damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil
may also overheat: contact with hot engine or with
exhaust components at high temperature could cause
fires.
Symbol What It Means What To Do
ELECTRONICTHROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNING
LIGHTS
This warning light, along with the related message, signals
a failure in the Electronic Throttle Control system (ETC).
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
If a failure is detected, the warning light turns on while the
engine is running.
Place the gear selector in the P (Park) position and the
ignition in the off position: the warning light should switch
off. If the warning light stays on with engine running, the
vehicle can still be driven.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the failure eliminated.
79
Symbol What It Means What To Do
If the warning light flashes with the engine running,
immediate intervention is required. A loss of
performance, irregular/high idling speed or engine
stopping might take place and the vehicle may need to be
towed.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the failure eliminated.
INSUFFICIENT ENGINE OIL LEVEL
The telltale turns on, along with the related message on
the display, to indicate low engine oil level.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE
The switching on of the telltale signals a failure in the
automatic steering correction system.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
ALTERNATOR FAILURE
The switching on of the telltale with engine on
corresponds to an alternator failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Amber Symbols
Symbol What It Means What To Do
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT
Engine Immobilizer System Failure
The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine
Immobilizer system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Break-In Attempt
The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to
ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt
detected by the alarm system.
Electronic Key Not Recognized
The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and
the electronic key is not recognized by the system.
Alarm System Failure
The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system
failure.
FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT
The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred
and the system has shut the fuel off.
For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to
“Enhanced Accident Response System” in “Occupant
Restraint Systems" in "Safety” for further information. If it
is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an
authorized dealer.
PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or is
not available.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD
The telltale will illuminate when the outside temperature
falls to or below 37°F (3°C).
81
Symbol What It Means What To Do
ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPED
The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time.
Note:
After the first indication, each time the engine is started
the symbol will continue to illuminate as described above
until the oil is changed.
If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a
fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now
necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of
the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated
by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the
engine from reaching operating temperature.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Caution!
Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) after it
first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When
this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.
Symbol What It Means What To Do
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil
pressure sensor failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level
sensor failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol What It Means What To Do
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM
FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED
The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the
Forward Collision Warning system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
START/STOP SYSTEM FAILURE
This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start system
failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the failure eliminated.
RAIN SENSOR FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the
automatic windshield wiper.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
DUSK SENSOR FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the
automatic low beam alignment.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
BLIND SPOTMONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE — IF
EQUIPPED
The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot
Monitoring system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor
failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
83
Symbol What It Means What To Do
EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the
following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking
lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer
lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators /
rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license plate
lights.
The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown
protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical
connection.
Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an
authorized dealer.
KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system
failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off
system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM FAILURE — IF
EQUIPPED
The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the
Lane Departure Warning system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE — IF
EQUIPPED
The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the
automatic high beam headlights.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the failure eliminated.
84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol What It Means What To Do
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING
The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission
overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this
case an engine performance limitation is carried out.
Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or
idling.
AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio
system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the failure eliminated.
SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE
While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed
Limiter system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the failure eliminated.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP
Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly
closed.
Tighten the cap properly.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to
signal a failure in the electric park brake system.
This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle
because the park brake could remain activated even if
automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant
controls. In these circumstances, you can disengage the
park brake following the emergency disengagement
procedure described in “In Case Of Emergency.”
If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not
engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and
remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands,
that the electric park brake is not operational.
Warning!
If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.
85
Symbol What It Means What To Do
LOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPED
This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle
coolant level is low.
Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.”
SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) is not operating and needs service.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
WEAR ON BRAKE PADS
This light will illuminate when the brake pads have
reached their wear limit.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Note:
Always use genuine parts or similar because the
Integrated Brake System (IBS) system could detect
anomalies.
Symbol What It Means What To Do
DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the
dynamic drive control system.
WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURE
Signals a windshield wiper failure.
Contact an authorized dealer.
86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Symbol What It Means What To Do
GENERIC INDICATION
Signals information and failures.
The accompanying messages describe the failure.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE
This telltale will illuminate to report a four wheel drive
system failure.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the failure eliminated.
ADAPTIVE FRONT-LIGHTING SYSTEM FAILURE
The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic
directional light system failure.
Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION — IF
EQUIPPED
The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable
suspension setting is activated.
SHOCK ABSORBERS FAILURE (ADC)
While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure
in the suspension system.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.
WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVEL
The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the
windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low.
To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in
“Servicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid with the
features indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section
in “Technical Specifications.”
87
Green Symbols
Symbol What It Means
HEADLIGHTS
The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.
START/STOP OPERATION
The telltale will illuminate in the case of Start/Stop system intervention (stopping the engine).
When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to “Stop/Start” in “Starting And
Operating”).
SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATED
The telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.
Blue Symbols
Symbol What it means
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.
HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS
The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.
88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM
Operation
The OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system)
carries out a continuous diagnosis of the
components of the vehicle related to
emissions.
It also alerts the driver of when these
components are no longer in peak
condition by switching on the
warning
light on the instrument panel (see
“Warning Lights And Messages”
paragraph in this chapter).
The aim of the OBD system (Onboard
Diagnostic) is to:
Monitor the efficiency of the system
Indicate an increase in emissions
Indicate the need to replace damaged
components
The vehicle also has a connector, which
can interface with appropriate tools, that
makes it possible to read the error codes
stored in the electronic control units
together with a series of specific
parameters for engine operation and
diagnosis. This check can be carried out
by your authorized dealer.
Note: After eliminating a fault, to check
the system completely, your authorized
dealer is obliged to run tests and, if
necessary certain road tests.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an
Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and
a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance
of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access
this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
Warning!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access,
information stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal
requirement to pass an inspection of your
vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle
registration.
For states that require
an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this
check verifies the
“Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.
The OBD II system may not be ready if
your vehicle was recently serviced,
recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should
be determined not ready for the I/M test,
your vehicle may fail the test.
89
Your vehicle has a simple ignition
actuated test, which you can use prior to
going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you
must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, but do not crank or start the
engine.
Note: If you crank or start the engine,
you will have to start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition
switch to the ON position, you will see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one
of two things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about ten
seconds and then return to being fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition
or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and
you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you
should see an authorized dealer or repair
facility. If your vehicle was recently
serviced or had a battery failure or
replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the
above test routine may then indicate that
the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is
illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle
serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS
The vehicle may be equipped with the
following active safety devices:
Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System
Drive Train Control (DTC) System
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
System
Traction Control System (TCS)
Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System
Hill Start Assist (HSA) System
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
System
For the operation of the systems, see the
following pages.
Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System
An integral part of the braking system,
the ABS prevents one or more wheels
from locking and slipping in all road
surface conditions, regardless of the
intensity of the braking action. The
system ensures that the vehicle can be
controlled even during emergency
braking, allowing the driver to optimize
stopping distances.
The system intervenes during braking
when the wheels are about to lock,
typically in emergency braking or
low-grip conditions where locking may be
more frequent.
The system also improves control and
stability of the vehicle when braking on a
surface where the grip of the left and
right wheels varies, such as in a corner.
The Electronic Braking Force Distribution
(EBD) system works with the ABS,
allowing the brake force to be distributed
between the front and rear wheels.
System Intervention
The ABS equipped on this vehicle is
provided with the "Brake-by-wire"
(Integrated Brake System - IBS) function.
With this system, the command given by
pressing the brake pedal is not
transmitted hydraulically, but electrically.
Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt
on the pedal with the traditional system
is no longer noticeable.
Warning!
The ABS contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be
susceptible to interference caused by
improperly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment
should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a
collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance
longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal
when you need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Drive Train Control (DTC) System — If
Equipped
Some models of this vehicle are equipped
with an All-Wheel Drive system (AWD),
which offers an optimal drive for
countless driving conditions and road
surfaces. The system reduces the
slipping of the tires to a minimum,
automatically redistributing the torque
to the front and rear wheels as needed.
To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle with
AWD automatically passes to rear-wheel
drive (RWD) when the road and
environmental conditions are such that
they wouldn't cause the tires to slip.
When the road and environmental
conditions require better traction, the
vehicle automatically goes to AWD mode.
92
SAFETY
The driving mode, RWD or AWD, is shown
on the instrument cluster display.
Note: If the system failure symbol
switches on, after starting the engine or
while driving, it means that the AWD
system is not working properly. If the
warning message activates frequently, it
is recommended to carry out the
maintenance operations.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
System
The ESC system improves the directional
control and stability of the vehicle in
various driving conditions.
The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s
understeer and oversteer, distributing
the brake force on the appropriate
wheels. The torque supplied by the
engine can also be reduced in order to
maintain control of the vehicle.
The ESC system uses sensors installed
on the vehicle to determine the path that
the driver intends to follow and
compares it with the vehicle’s effective
path. When the real path deviates from
the desired path, the ESC system
intervenes to counter the vehicle’s
understeer or oversteer.
Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is
turning more than it should according to
the angle of the steering wheel.
Understeer occurs when the vehicle is
turning less than it should according to
the angle of the steering wheel.
System Intervention
The intervention of the system is
indicated by the flashing of the ESC
warning light on the instrument panel, to
inform the driver that the vehicle
stability and grip are critical.
Warning!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC
also cannot prevent accidents resulting from
loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to
properly maintain your vehicle, may change
the handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The system automatically operates in the
event of slipping, loss of grip on wet
roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration on
one or both drive wheels on roads that
are slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending
on the slipping conditions, two different
control systems are activated:
If the slipping involves both drive
wheels, the system intervenes, reducing
the power transmitted by the engine.
If the slipping only involves one of the
drive wheels, the Brake Limited
Differential (BLD) function is activated,
automatically braking the wheel which is
slipping (the behavior of a self-locking
differential is simulated). This will
increase the engine torque transferred to
the wheel which isn't slipping.
System Intervention
The intervention of the system is
indicated by the flashing of the ESC
warning light on the instrument panel, to
inform the driver that the vehicle
stability and grip are critical.
93
Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System
The PBA system is designed to improve
the vehicle’s braking capacity during
emergency braking.
The system detects emergency braking
by monitoring the speed and force with
which the brake pedal is pressed, and
consequently applies the optimal brake
pressure. This can reduce the braking
distance: the PBA system therefore
complements the ABS.
Maximum assistance from the PBA
system is obtained by pressing the brake
pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake
pedal should be pressed continuously
during braking, avoiding intermittent
presses, to get the most out of the
system. Do not reduce pressure on the
brake pedal until braking is no longer
necessary.
The PBA system is deactivated when the
brake pedal is released.
Warning!
The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA
cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
PBA-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) System
This is an integral part of the ESC system
and facilitates starting on slopes,
activating automatically in the following
cases:
Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road
with a gradient higher than 5%, engine
running, brake pressed and transmission
in NEUTRAL (N) or gear other than
REVERSE (R) engaged.
Downhill: vehicle stationary on a road
with a gradient higher than 5%, engine
running, brake pressed and reverse gear
engaged.
When setting off, the ESC system control
unit maintains the braking pressure on
the wheels until the engine torque
necessary for starting is reached, or in
any case for a maximum of two seconds,
allowing your right foot to be moved
easily from the brake pedal to the
accelerator.
The system will automatically deactivate
after two seconds without starting,
gradually releasing the braking pressure.
During this release stage, it is possible to
hear a typical mechanical brake release
noise, indicating the imminent movement
of the vehicle.
Warning!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight
rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or
with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a
trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active
driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is
always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
94
SAFETY
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System
The DST function uses the integration of
the ESC system with the electric power
steering to increase the safety level of
the whole vehicle.
In critical situations (braking on surfaces
with different grip conditions), the ESC
system controls the steering through the
DST function to implement an additional
torque contribution on the steering wheel
in order to suggest the most correct
maneuver to the driver.
The coordinated action of the brakes and
steering increases the sensation of
safety and control of the vehicle.
Note: The DST feature is only meant to
help the driver realize the correct course
of action through small torques on the
steering wheel, which means the
effectiveness of the DST feature is highly
dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It
is very important to realize that this
feature will not steer the vehicle,
meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
The following auxiliary driving systems
are available in this vehicle:
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If
Equipped
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — If
Equipped
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
— If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
uses two radar sensors, located in the
rear bumper (one for each side), to detect
the presence of other vehicles in the rear
side blind spots of your vehicle.
The system warns the driver about the
presence of other vehicles in the
detection area by illuminating the
warning light located within the door
mirror on the side in which the other
vehicle was detected. If equipped, an
audible chime will also be heard to alert
the driver (if option is selected within the
Information and Entertainment System).
When the engine is started the warning
light turns on to signal the driver that the
system is active.
Sensors
The sensors are activated when any
forward gear is engaged at a speed
higher than 6 mph (10 km/h) or when
REVERSE is engaged.
The sensors are temporarily deactivated
when the vehicle is in PARK.
The detection area of the system covers
approximately one lane on both sides of
the vehicle.
This area begins from the door mirror and
extends for 19 ft (6 m) towards the rear
part of the vehicle.
When the sensors are active, the system
monitors the detection areas on both
06016S0001B
Rear Sensor Location
06016S0002EM
BSM Indicator Light
95
sides of the vehicle and warns the driver
about the possible presence of vehicles
in these areas.
While driving, the system monitors the
detection area from three different
points (side, rear and front) to check
whether an alert needs to be sent to the
driver. The system can detect the
presence of a vehicle in one of these
three areas.
Note:
The system does not alert the driver
for the presence of fixed object (e.g.
safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.).
However, in some circumstances, the
system may activate in the presence of
these objects. This is normal and does
not indicate a system malfunction.
The system does not alert the driver
about the presence of vehicles coming
from the opposite direction, in the
adjacent lanes.
Warning!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system,
always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over
your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Rear View
The system detects vehicles coming from
the rear part of your vehicle on both sides
and entering the rear detection area with
a difference in speed of less than 31 mph
(50 km/h) with relation to your vehicle.
Overtaking Vehicles
If another vehicle is overtaken slowly,
with a difference in speed of less than
15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle stays in
the blind spot for approximately
1.5 seconds, the warning light on the door
mirror of the corresponding side
illuminates.
If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(25 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP)
System
This system helps the driver during
reverse maneuvers in the case of reduced
visibility.
The RCP system monitors the rear
detection areas on both sides of the
vehicle to detect objects moving towards
the sides of the vehicle, with a minimum
speed between 1 mph (1 km/h) and
2 mph (3 km/h) and objects moving at a
maximum speed of 21 mph (35 km/h), in
areas such as parking lots.
The system activation is signaled to the
driver by an audible warning.
Note:
If the sensors are covered by objects
or vehicles, the system will not warn the
driver.
For the system to operate correctly,
the rear bumper area where the radar
sensors are located must stay free from
snow, ice and dirt gathered from the
road surface.
Do not cover the rear bumper area
where the radar sensors are located with
any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack,
etc.).
Warning!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
back up aid system. It is intended to be used
to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be
careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
96
SAFETY
Operating Mode
The system may be activated/
deactivated via the Information and
Entertainment System. To access the
function, select the following items on
the main menu in sequence:
1. “Settings.”
2. “Safety.”
3. “Blind Spot Alert.”
"Blind Spot Alert” Visual Mode
When the system is enabled, the warning
light within the door mirror on the side of
the detected object illuminates.
The visual warning on the mirror will blink
if the driver activates the turn signals,
indicating a lane change.
The warning will be fixed if the driver
stays in the same lane.
"Blind Spot Alert" Function
Deactivation
When the system is deactivated ("Blind
Spot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCP
systems will not emit an audible or a
visual warning.
The BSM system will store the operating
mode running when the engine was
stopped. Each time the engine is started,
the operating mode stored previously will
be recalled and used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on
radio frequency that comply with Part
15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with
Industry Canada Standards RSS-
GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these
systems by other than an authorized
service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
System — If Equipped
This is a driving assistance system which
comprises a radar located behind the
front bumper and a camera located in the
central part of the windshield.
In the event of an imminent collision, the
system intervenes by automatically
braking the vehicle to prevent the
collision or reduce its effects.
06016S0003B
Front Bumper Radar Location
06016S0004B
Windshield Camera Location
97
The system provides the driver with
audible and visual signals through
dedicated messages on the instrument
cluster display.
The system may lightly brake to warn the
driver if a potential front end collision is
detected (limited braking). Signals and
limited braking are intended to allow the
driver time to intervene.
In situations with the risk of collision, if
the system detects no intervention by
the driver, it provides automatic braking
to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the
potential front end collision (automatic
braking). If intervention by the driver on
the brake pedal is detected, but not
deemed sufficient, the system may
intervene in order to improve the
reaction of the braking system by
reducing vehicle speed further
(additional assistance in braking stage).
The system will intervene automatically
in case of imminent collision or impact
against a pedestrian crossing the road
(speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)).
Note: For safety reasons, when the
vehicle has stopped, the brake calipers
may remain blocked for about two
seconds. Make sure to press the brake
pedal if the vehicle moves slightly
forward.
Warning!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Engagement/Disengagement
The following functions can be selected
in sequence using the Information and
Entertainment System:
1. “Settings.”
2. “Safety.”
3. “Forward Collision Warning.”
4. “Mode.”
Select from among three operating
modes:
Warning And Brake: the system (if
active), in addition to the visual and
audible warnings, provides limited
braking, automatic braking, and
additional assistance in braking stage
where the driver does not brake
sufficiently in the event of a potential
front end collision.
Only Warning: the system (if active),
does not provide limited braking, but
guarantees automatic braking or
additional assistance in braking stage
where the driver does not brake at all or
not sufficiently enough in the event of a
potential front end collision.
Disabled: the system does not provide
visual and audible warnings, limited
braking, automatic braking, or additional
assistance in braking stage. The system
will therefore provide no indication of a
possible collision.
Activation/Deactivation
The Forward Collision Warning system is
activated whenever the engine is started
regardless of what is shown on the
Information and Entertainment System.
Following a deactivation, the system will
not warn the driver about the possible
collision with the preceding vehicle,
regardless of the setting selected with
the Information and Entertainment
System.
Note: Each time the engine is started,
the system is activated regardless of
what setting was selected when the
engine was turned OFF
98
SAFETY
The system is active:
Each time the engine is started.
In the Information and Entertainment
System.
When the ignition is in the ON position.
The vehicle speed is between 4 mph
(7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h).
When the front seat belts are
fastened.
Changing The System Sensitivity
The sensitivity of the system can be
changed through the Information and
Entertainment System menu, choosing
from one of the following three options:
"Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to the
description in the “Information and
Entertainment System Supplement” for
how to change the settings.
The default setting is "Med". With this
setting, the system warns the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front
when that vehicle is at a standard
distance, between that of the other two
settings.
With the system sensitivity set to "Far",
the system will warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front
when that vehicle is at a greater distance,
thus providing the possibility of acting on
the brakes more lightly and gradually.
This setting provides the drivers with the
maximum possible reaction time to
prevent a potential collision.
With the option set to "Near", the system
will alert the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front when that vehicle
is close. This setting offers the driver a
lower reaction time compared to the
"Med" and "Far" settings, in the event of a
potential collision, but permits more
dynamic driving of the vehicle.
The system sensitivity setting is kept in
the memory when the engine is turned
OFF.
System Limited Operation Signal
If a dedicated message is displayed, a
condition limiting the system operation
may have occurred. The possible reasons
of this limitation are if something is
blocking the camera view, or a fault is
present.
If an obstruction is signaled, clean the
area of the windshield.
Although the vehicle can still be driven in
normal conditions, the system may be not
completely available.
When the conditions limiting the system
functions end, this will go back to normal
and complete operation. Should the fault
persist, contact your authorized dealer.
System Failure Signaling
If the system turns off and a dedicated
message is shown on the display, it
means that there is a fault with the
system.
In this case, it is still possible to drive the
vehicle, but you are advised to contact
you authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Radar Indication Not Available
If conditions are such that the radar
cannot detect obstacles correctly, the
system is deactivated and a dedicated
message appears on the display. This
generally occurs in the event of poor
visibility, such as when it is snowing or
raining heavily.
The function of this system can also be
temporarily reduced due to obstructions
such as mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In
such cases, a dedicated message will be
shown on the display and the system will
be deactivated. This message can
sometimes appear in conditions of high
reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective
tiles or ice or snow). When the conditions
limiting the system functions end, it will
go back to normal and complete
operation.
In certain cases, this dedicated message
could be displayed when the radar is not
detecting any vehicles or objects within
its view range.
If atmospheric conditions are not the
reason behind this message, check if the
sensor is dirty. It could be necessary to
clean or remove any obstructions in the
area.
99
If the message appears frequently, even
in the absence of atmospheric conditions
such as snow, rain, mud or other
obstructions, contact your authorized
dealer for a sensor alignment check.
In the absence of visible obstructions,
manually removing the decorative cover
trim and cleaning the radar surface could
be required. Have this operation
performed at your authorized dealer.
Note: It is recommended that you do not
install devices, accessories, or
aerodynamic attachments in front of the
sensor or darken it in any way, as this can
compromise the correct functioning of
the system.
Frontal Collision Alarm With Active
Braking
If this function is selected, the brakes are
operated to reduce the speed of the
vehicle in the event of potential collision.
This function applies an additional
braking pressure if the braking pressure
applied by the driver does not suffice to
prevent potential collision.
The function is active with speed above
4 mph (7 km/h).
Driving In Special Conditions
In certain driving conditions, system
intervention might be unexpected or
delayed. The driver must therefore be
very careful, keeping control of the
vehicle.
Driving close to a bend.
The vehicle ahead is leaving a
roundabout.
Vehicles with small dimensions and/or
not aligned in the driving lane.
Lane change by other vehicles.
Vehicles traveling at right angles to the
vehicle.
Note: In particularly complex traffic
conditions, the driver can deactivate the
system manually through the Information
and Entertainment System.
Driving Close To A Bend
When entering or leaving a wide bend, the
system may detect a vehicle in front you,
but not in the same driving lane. In cases
such as these, the system may intervene.
The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A
Roundabout
On a roundabout, the system could
intervene if it detects a vehicle ahead
which is leaving the roundabout.
06016S0005EM
Driving Around Wide Curves
06016S0010EM
Driving In Roundabouts
100
SAFETY
Vehicles With Small Dimensions
And/Or Not Aligned In The Driving Lane
The system cannot detect vehicles in
front of you but outside the range of the
radar sensor and may therefore not react
in the presence of small vehicles, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
Lane Change By Other Vehicles
Vehicles suddenly changing lanes to enter
the same lane as your vehicle within the
operating range of the radar sensor, may
cause the system to intervene.
Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To
The Vehicle
The system may temporarily react to a
vehicle that is passing through the radar
sensor’s operating range at right angles.
Warning!
The system has not been designed to
prevent impacts and cannot detect possible
conditions leading to an accident in
advance. Failure to take into account this
warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries.
The system may activate, assessing the
trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of
reflecting metal objects different from
other vehicles, such as safety barriers, road
signs, barriers before parking lots, tollgates,
level crossings, gates, railways, objects near
road constructions sites or higher than the
vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the
system may intervene inside multi-story
parking lots or tunnels, or due to a glare on
the road surface. These possible activations
are a consequence of the real driving
scenario coverage by the system and must
not be regarded as faults.
The system has been designed for road
use only. If the vehicle is driven on a track,
the system must be deactivated to avoid
unnecessary warnings. Automatic
deactivation is signaled by the dedicated
warning light/symbol switching on in the
instrument panel (refer to the instructions in
the "Warning Lights And Messages On The
Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel" for further information).
06016S0006EM
Driving Near Small Vehicles
06016S0007EM
Other Vehicles Changing Lanes
06016V0008EM
Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar
Range
101
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on
radio frequency that comply with Part
15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with
Industry Canada Standards RSS-
GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these
systems by other than an authorized
service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that
sends the inflation pressure information
of each tire to the control unit, and will
signal the driver in the event of
insufficient tire pressure.
Tire pressure will vary with temperature
by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every
12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure
should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal, and there
should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will signal the driver if
pressure falls below the warning limit for
any reason, including the effects of low
temperature and normal loss of pressure
from the tire.
The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient
tire pressure when pressure is equal to or
greater than the prescribed cold inflation
level. Therefore, if insufficient tire
pressure is indicated by the (
) warning
light displaying in the instrument cluster,
increase the inflation pressure up to the
prescribed cold inflation value.
The system will automatically update,
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Operating Example
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than
three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is
68°F (20°C), and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).This tire
pressure is low enough to turn on the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light.”
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on.
In this situation, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Warning Light” will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value.
102
SAFETY
Caution!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation
or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM
sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
Insufficient Tire Pressure Indication
If an insufficient pressure value is
detected on one or more tires, the
warning light in the instrument cluster
will display alongside the dedicated
messages, the system will highlight the
tire or tires with insufficient pressure
graphically, and an acoustic signal will be
emitted.
In this case, stop the vehicle, check the
inflation pressure of each tire, and inflate
the necessary tire or tires to the correct
cold inflation pressure value, shown on
the display or in the dedicated TPMS
menu.
TPMS Temporarily Disabled — TPMS
Check Message
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds, and then
remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled,
this sequence will repeat, provided that
the system fault still exists. The “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off when the fault condition no
longer exists. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or
driving next to facilities emitting the
same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket
window tinting that affects radio wave
signals.
Accumulation of snow or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with
TPMS sensors.
After the punctured tire has been
repaired with the original tire sealant
contained in the Tire Repair Kit, the
previous condition must be restored so
that the
warning light is off during
normal driving.
TPMS Deactivation
The TPMS can be deactivated by
replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS
Sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road
tires) with tires not equipped with Tire
Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors.
Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will
chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICETPM SYSTEM”
message and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure values.
103
Beginning with the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or
display the “SERVICETPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster.
Instead, dashes (--) will remain in place of
the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires)
with tires equipped with TPM sensors.
Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light"
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then turn off. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICETPM SYSTEM”
message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition switch cycle the "SERVICETPM
SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed, as long as no system fault
exists.
Note:
The TPMS is not intended to replace
normal tire care and maintenance, or to
provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a
tire pressure gauge while adjusting your
tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire will cause the tire to
overheat, and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate
tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”.
Seasonal temperature changes will
affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will
monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
General Information
The following regulatory statement
applies to all radio frequency (RF)
devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference.
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
104
SAFETY
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety
features in your vehicle are the restraint
systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems
(SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in
this section may be standard equipment
on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the
information in this section. It tells you
how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take
to minimize the risk of harm from a
deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under
should always ride buckled up in the rear
seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in
a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in
the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint (refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further
information).
3. Children that are not big enough to
wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer
to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information) should be secured in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat
in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not
use child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats should ride properly
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their
arm.
5. You should read the instructions
provided with your child restraint to
make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear
their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats
should be moved back as far as practical
to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or
window. If your vehicle has side air bags,
and deployment occurs, the side air bags
will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and
occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle
needs to be modified to accommodate a
disabled person, refer to the “Customer
Assistance” section for customer service
contact information.
Warning!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
105
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an
excellent driver, even on short trips.
Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save
lives, and they can reduce the
seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection
and the risk of injury caused by striking
the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a
motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if
equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to
remind the driver and outboard front
seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert
feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the STARTor ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first in the START or
ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard
front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the STARTor ON/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on
and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is
activated when the vehicle is moving
above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has
completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence
may repeat based on vehicle speed until
the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts
are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the
outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock
only during very sudden stops or
collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions.
However, in a collision the seat belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out
of the vehicle.
106
SAFETY
Warning!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers,
or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Occupants, including the driver, should
always wear their seat belts whether or not
an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury
or death in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you
could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow
these instructions to wear your seat belt
safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person,
no matter what their size.
Warning!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your
body, without twists. If you can’t straighten
a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an
authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not
protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you
could move too far forward, increasing the
possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt
snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart
in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble
or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door.
Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the
back of the front seat, and next to your
arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the
latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as
far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
go around your lap.
107
3. When the seat belt is long enough to
fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug
and lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red
button on the buckle. The seat belt will
automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow the seat
belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting
Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a
twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)
above the latch plate, grasp and twist the
seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the
latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the
folded webbing. The folded webbing
must enter the slot at the top of the latch
plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up
until it clears the folded webbing and the
seat belt is no longer twisted.
Second Row Center Seat Belt
Operating Instructions
06046S0001NA
Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat
Belt Buckle
06056S0002EM
Second Row Seat Belts
1—SeatBelt
Buckle
2 — Seat Belt
Latch Plate
3 — Mini Latch
Plate
4 — Mini Seat Belt
Buckle
5 — Mini Buckle
Release
108
SAFETY
The second row center seat belt features
a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
buckle, which allows the seat belt to
detach from the lower anchor when the
seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate can then be stored out
of the way in the parcel tray for added
convenience to open up utilization of the
storage areas behind the front seats
when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate from its stowed
position in the right rear side trim panel.
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the
seat belt over the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside
of the right head restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to
fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around your
lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to
fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug
and lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your
chest so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red
button on the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate
from the mini-buckle for storage, insert
the regular latch plate into the black
button on the top of the mini-buckle. The
seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the
latch plate down the webbing to allow the
seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
into its stowed position.
Warning!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt is
used by an occupant, the seat belt will not
be able to provide proper restraint and will
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow
the preceding procedure to detach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the
webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of
injury in the event of an accident is
reduced for the mother and the unborn
child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below
the abdomen and across the strong
bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the
back or under the arm.
0226075266
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
109
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are
designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These
devices may improve the performance of
the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child
restraints.
Note: These devices are not a substitute
for proper seat belt placement by the
occupant. The seat belt still must be worn
snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC).
Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must
be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that
may help further reduce the risk of injury
in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which
is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to
“Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The
figure below illustrates the locking
feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is
equipped with an ALR and is being used
for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section
so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the
webbing to retract completely in this
case and then carefully pull out only the
amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder
belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat
belt will still retract to remove any slack
in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a
seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Warning!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front
air bag can cause death or serious injury to a
child 12 years or younger, including a child in a
rear-facing child restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking
Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the
seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now
in the Automatic Locking Mode.
06086S0102NA
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
110
SAFETY
How To Disengage The Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
and activate the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode.
Warning!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced
if the switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat
belt function is not working properly when
checked according to the procedures in the
Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode
to restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in
this section may be standard equipment
on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to
protect you in a collision. The Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air
Bag System Components. Your vehicle
may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition
switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC
position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag
system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to
deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for
approximately four to eight seconds for a
self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will
turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction
in any part of the system, it turns on the
Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single
chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that
will illuminate the instrument panel Air
Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag
system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be
maintenance free, if any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not
come on during the four to eight seconds
when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on
after the four to eight-second interval.
111
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while
driving.
Note: If the speedometer, tachometer,
or any engine related gauges are not
working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be
ready to inflate for your protection. Have
an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Warning!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if
it comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
stay on until the fault is cleared. In
addition, a single chime will sound to alert
you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately.
For additional information regarding the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and
lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and
front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above
the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
06106S0001EM
Driver Air Bag
06106S0002EM
Passenger Air Bag
0502122443US
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact
Bolsters/Supplemental Knee Air Bags
112
SAFETY
Warning!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air
bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of
collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may
receive information from the front
impact sensors (if equipped) or other
system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered
immediately during an impact that
requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a
driver and/or front passenger seat belt
buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is
buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver
and/or front passenger seat track
position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags based upon seat position.
Warning!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag
to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags and
you could be injured because the air bags
may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed
to open only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing
the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in
rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage —
for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type
and location of impact, front air bags may
deploy in crashes with little vehicle
front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good
indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your
protection in all collisions, and also are
needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision
requiring the front air bags, it signals the
inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and
the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full
size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
113
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect
the knees of the driver and front
passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with
the front air bags.
Warning!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front
Passenger Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column and a Supplemental
Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the
instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee
Air Bags provide enhanced protection
during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard
side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on
the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam
on the outboard side of the seatback’s
trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with
such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
06096S0102NA
Driver Knee Air Bag
06096S0103NA
Front Passenger Knee Air Bag
06106S0004EM
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bag
114
SAFETY
Warning!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely
affected and/or objects could be pushed into
you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtains (SABICs) are located above the
side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head
and other injuries to front and rear seat
outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering
the side windows. An inflating SABIC
pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window.
The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs
inflate. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle
occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
Warning!
Do not mount equipment, or stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to
block the deployment of the SABICs. The
trim covering above the side windows where
the SABIC and its deployment path are
located should remain free from any
obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as
intended, do not install any accessory items
in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do
not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not
drill into the roof of the vehicle for any
reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular impact
event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side
impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated
to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact
side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection.
In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys
the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side
Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all
side collisions, including some collisions
at certain angles, or some side collisions
that do not impact the area of the
passenger compartment. The Side Air
Bags may deploy during angled or offset
frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
06106S0005EM
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Location
115
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the
seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags
deploy in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes.
Warning!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your
protection in all collisions. They also help
keep you in position, away from an inflating
Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must
wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
Warning!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags
during deployment could cause you to be
severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
Note: Air bag covers may not be obvious
in the interior trim, but they will open
during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain rollover events. The ORC
determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover
event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator
of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all
rollover events. The rollover sensing
system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether
deployment is appropriate. In the event
the vehicle experiences a rollover or near
rollover event, and deployment of the
Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will also deploy the seat
belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle
occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
Note: The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with
electrical Air Bag System Components
listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
Note: Front and/or side air bags will not
deploy in all collisions. This does not
mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
116
SAFETY
If you do have a collision which deploys
the air bags, any or all of the following
may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes
cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to
the occupants as the air bags deploy and
unfold. The abrasions are similar to
friction rope burns or those you might get
sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.
They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see
your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see
some smoke-like particles. The particles
are a normal by-product of the process
that generates the non-toxic gas used for
air bag inflation. These airborne particles
may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or
throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose
or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If
the irritation continues, see your doctor.
If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s
instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air
bags have deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the air bags will not be
in place to protect you.
Warning!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as
well.
Note:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in
the interior trim, but they will open
during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should
be taken to an authorized dealer
immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response
System
In the event of an impact, if the
communication network remains intact,
and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric
motor (If Equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the
battery has power
Turn on the interior lights, which
remain on as long as the battery has
power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
117
Your vehicle may also be designed to
perform any of these other functions in
response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off
the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC
Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
–Engine
–Electric Motor (if equipped)
–Electric power steering
–Brake booster
–Electric park brake
–Automatic transmission gear
selector
–Horn
–Front wiper
–Headlamp washer pump
Note: After an accident, remember to
cycle the ignition to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining
the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the
engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices
(e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset
the system by following the procedure
described below. If you have any doubt,
please see an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response
System Reset Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system
is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff
is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from
ignition AVV/STARTor MAR/ACC/ON/
RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the
left and right turn signal lights, located in
the instrument panel, may both be
blinking and will continue to blink. In order
to move your vehicle to the side of the
road, you must follow the system reset
procedure.
118
SAFETY
Customer Action
Customer Will See
Note:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
Neutral
State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed
in Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be
completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be
performed again in order to be successful.
119
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Warning!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced
in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: EDR data are recorded by your
vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during
a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be
buckled up at all times, including babies
and children. Every state in the United
States, and every Canadian province,
requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if
available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in
the front.
120
SAFETY
Warning!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of
restraints for children from newborn size
to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child.
Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child
restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system,
make sure that it has a label certifying
that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure
that you can install it in the vehicle where
you will use it.
Note:
For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/
parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to
Transport Canada’s website for
additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children
who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight
limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have out-grown the height or weight limit of
their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
out-grown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
121
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children
ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they
are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing:
infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing
in the vehicle. It is recommended for
children from birth until they reach the
weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either
rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the
rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest
weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
Warning!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who
have outgrown their rear-facing
convertible child seat can ride
forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the
forward-facing direction are for children
who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or
height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with
a harness for as long as possible, up to
the highest weight or height allowed by
the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is
above the forward-facing limit for the
child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child
and belt-positioning booster seat are
held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
Warning!
Improper installation can lead to failure
of an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove the
child restraint before adjusting the vehicle
seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In
a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the
occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster
Seats
Children who are large enough to wear
the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose
legs are long enough to bend over the
front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat
belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
122
SAFETY
1. Can the child sit all the way back
against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably
over the front of the vehicle seat – while
the child is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the
child’s shoulder between their neck and
arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs and
not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions
was “no,” then the child still needs to use a
booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is
using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat
belt fit periodically and make sure the
seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s
squirming or slouching can move the belt
out of position. If the shoulder belt
contacts the face or neck, move the child
closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt
on the child correctly.
Warning!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up
to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
123
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called
LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH
system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child
seats without using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Some seating positions may have a
top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions,
the seat belt must be used with the top
tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table
for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system
to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower anchorage?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat
in the center seating position.
022668173
LATCH Label
06086S0101NA
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
TopTether Anchorage Symbol
124
SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to
install a child seat in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual
for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in each seating
position
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages
are round bars that are
found at the rear of the
seat cushion where it
meets the seatback.
Each anchorage is
under a cover with the
anchorage symbol on it.
Lift the cover to access the lower
anchorage.
Locating The Upper Tether
Anchorages
There are tether strap
anchorages behind each
rear seating position
located in the panel
between the rear
seatback and the rear
window. They are found
under a plastic cover
with the tether anchorage symbol on it.
06086S0009EM
LATCH Anchorage Locations
1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar
2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations
125
LATCH-compatible child restraint
systems will be equipped with a rigid bar
or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the
lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to
tighten the strap after it is attached to
the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Warning!
Do not install a child restraint in the
center position using the LATCH system.
This position is not approved for installing
child seats using the LATCH attachments.
You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing
your child restraint. Not all child restraint
systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type
of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and on the tether strap of the child
seat so that you can more easily attach
the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the
lower anchorages for that seating
position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise
the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors
of the child restraint to the lower
anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether
strap, connect it to the top tether
anchorage. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push
the child restraint rearward and
downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
06086S0104NA
Upper Tether Anchorage Location
126
SAFETY
6. Test that the child restraint is
installed tightly by pulling back and forth
on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in
any direction.
How To Stow An Unused
Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system
to install a child restraint, stow all ALR
seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure
child restraints. An unused belt could
injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor.
Before installing a child restraint using
the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt
interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and
then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they
should not play with them.
Warning!
Improper installation of a child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using
The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
Warning!
Improper installation or failure to
properly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could be
badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that
is designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint
so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched”
into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then
letting the webbing retract back into the
retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for
additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the
following sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For
Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle
06086S0102NA
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
TopTether Anchorage Symbol
127
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight
of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit
of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in each
seating position.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
Warning!
Improper installation or failure to
properly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could be
badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of
the seating position. For some second
row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing
from the retractor to pass it through the
belt path of the child restraint. Do not
twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap
portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to
retract back into the retractor. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
128
SAFETY
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the
retractor. If it is locked, you should not be
able to pull out any webbing. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing
to tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into
the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether
strap and the seating position has a top
tether anchorage, connect the tether
strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is
installed tightly by pulling back and forth
on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in
any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with
time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using
The Top Tether Anchorage:
Warning!
Do not attach a tether strap for a
rear-facing car seat to any location in front
of the car seat, including the seat frame or a
tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the
vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint
System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position
where you plan to install the child
restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward
to provide better access to the tether
anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position,
move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the
anchor directly behind the seat where
you are placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path for the strap between
the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint,
and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the
tether strap around the outboard side of
the head restraint.
06086S0104NA
Upper Tether Anchorage Location
129
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the
child restraint to the top tether
anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
Warning!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap
could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seatbacks
as you remove slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could
harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be
thrown about and possibly injured, or
injure a passenger during panic braking or
in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
SAFETYTIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORTPASSENGERS IN
THE CARGO AREA.
Warning!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
Warning!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage
or in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the
trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure
that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed.
DO NOTuse the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your heating
or cooling controls to force outside air into
the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a
properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the
sound of the exhaust system, when
exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged, have a competent
mechanic inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
130
SAFETY
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a
collision if they have been damaged (i.e.,
bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If
there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat
belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on
for four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first turned to
ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light
will illuminate with a single chime when a
fault with the Air Bag System has been
detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while
driving, have your authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost
mode and place the blower control on
high speed. You should be able to feel the
air directed against the windshield. See
your authorized dealer for service if your
defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit
your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that
does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.
Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so
it cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
Warning!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle
control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners
on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVETHE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit
your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat
for the specific make, model, and year of
your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on
the driver’s side floor area. To check for
interference, with the vehicle properly
parked with the engine off, fully depress the
accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat
on the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
131
If the vehicle carpet has been removed
and re-installed, always properly attach
carpet to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear
and uneven wear patterns. Check for
stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect
the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for
proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of
brake lights and exterior lights while you
work the controls. Check turn signal and
high beam indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and
locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after
overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or
other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes
are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid
leaks are suspected. The cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
132
SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
Let’s get to the core of the vehicle, and
see how you can explore its fullest
potential. We’ll look at how to drive
safely in any situation, making it a
welcome companion with our comfort
and wallets in mind.
STARTING THE ENGINE ........134
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF
EQUIPPED ................137
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS .........137
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ........138
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION.....141
ALFA DNA SELECTOR .........146
ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) —
IF EQUIPPED ...............149
STOP/STARTSYSTEM .........150
SPEED LIMITER .............152
SPEED CONTROL
(CRUISE CONTROL) ..........153
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC) — IF EQUIPPED .........155
PARK SENSORS SYSTEM .......162
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .......167
REAR BACK-UP CAMERA /
DYNAMIC GRIDLINES .........170
REFUELING THE VEHICLE .......172
VEHICLE LOADING ...........173
TRAILER TOWING ............174
SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING.....175
133
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting the engine, be sure to
adjust the seat, the interior rear view
mirrors, and the door mirrors, and fasten
the seat belt correctly.
Never press the accelerator pedal before
starting the engine.
If necessary, messages indicating the
starting procedure can be shown in the
display.
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
Starting Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Apply the electric park brake and set
the gear selector to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N).
2. Fully depress the brake pedal without
touching the accelerator.
3. Briefly push the ignition button.
4. If the engine doesn't start within a few
seconds, you need to repeat the
procedure.
If the problem persists, contact an
authorized dealer.
Warning!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your
vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission cannot be
started this way. Unburned fuel could enter
the catalytic converter and once the engine
has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency”
for further information.
Caution!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
Remote Starting System
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of at least 300
feet (91 meters).
The remote starting system also
activates the climate control (if
equipped), the heated seats (if equipped),
and the heated steering wheel (if
equipped), depending on temperatures
outside and inside of the vehicle.
Note:
Obstructions between the vehicle
and key fob may reduce this range.
134
STARTING AND OPERATING
How to use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be
met before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK (P).
Doors closed.
Hood closed.
Trunk closed.
Hazard switch off.
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pressed).
Battery at an acceptable charge level.
PANIC button not pushed.
System not disabled from previous
remote start event.
Vehicle alarm system indicator
flashing.
Ignition in the OFF mode.
Fuel level meets minimum
requirement.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the
heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on in
cold weather.
These features will stay on through the
duration of remote start also until the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode.
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped
When remote start is active and the
outside ambient temperature is less than
39°F (4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
will be enabled. Exiting remote start will
resume previous operation, except if the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active.
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and
operation will continue.
Cold Weather Operation
To prevent possible engine damage while
starting at low temperatures, this vehicle
will inhibit engine cranking when the
ambient temperature is less than –22° F
(–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor
reading indicates an engine block heater
has not been used. An externally-
powered electric engine block heater is
available as optional equipment or from
your authorized dealer.
The message “plug in engine heater” will
be displayed in the instrument cluster
when the ambient temperature is below
5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is
shut off as a reminder to avoid possible
crank delays at the next cold start.
Caution!
Use of the recommended oil and adhering to
the prescribed oil change intervals is important
to prevent engine damage and ensure
satisfactory starting in cold conditions.
Extended Park Starting
If the vehicle has not been started or
driven for at least 35 days, it is advisable
to follow the indications below.
To start the engine, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push the ignition button
2. If the engine does not start, wait five
seconds and let the starter cool down and
then repeat the starting procedure
3. If the engine does not start after eight
attempts, let the starter cool down for at
least 10 seconds, and then repeat the
starting procedure
If the problem persists, contact your
authorized dealer.
Note: After prolonged vehicle inactivity,
very difficult starting, that can be noticed
through rapid fatigue of the starter,
might also be due to a discharged
battery. In this case, see the "Jump
Starting" section in the "In Case Of
Emergency" chapter.
If Engine Fails To Start
Starting the Engine with Key Fob
Battery Run Down or Drained
If the ignition does not respond when the
button is pushed, the key fob battery
might be run down or drained. Therefore,
the system does not detect the presence
of the key fob in the vehicle, and will
display a dedicated message.
135
In this case, follow the instructions
outlined in "Starting With A Discharged
Key Fob Battery" in the "Getting To Know
Your Vehicle" chapter, and start the
engine normally.
Warning!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your
vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission cannot be
started this way. Unburned fuel could enter
the catalytic converter and once the engine
has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency”
for further information.
Caution!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
After Starting — Warming Up The
Engine
Proceed as follows:
Travel slowly, letting the engine run at
a reduced RPM, without accelerating
suddenly.
It is recommended to wait until the
digital engine coolant temperature
indicator starts to rise for maximum
performance.
Stopping The Engine
To stop the engine, proceed as follows:
1. Park the vehicle in a position that is
not dangerous for oncoming traffic.
2. Engage the PARK (P) mode.
3. With engine idling, push the
START/STOP button on the steering
wheel to STOP the engine.
Note: Do not leave the ignition in ON
mode when the engine is off.
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must
push and hold the ignition or push the
START/STOP button three times
consecutively within a few seconds. The
engine will shut down, and the ignition will
be placed in the ON mode
With the keyless ignition system, it is
possible to go away from the vehicle
taking the key fob with you, without the
engine switching off. The vehicle will
inform about the absence of the key on
board, only if the doors are closed.
Stopping the engine (cycling from the ON
to the STOP position) the accessories are
still powered for about three minutes, or
until a door is opened.
When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF
mode, the window switches remain active
for three minutes. Opening a front door
will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to
allow the temperature inside the engine
compartment to cool before shutting off
the engine.
Turbocharger Cool Down
It is recommended before switching the
vehicle off, to keep the engine idling for a
few minutes so that the turbocharger can
be suitably lubricated. This procedure is
particularly recommended after severe
driving.
After a full load operation, keep the
engine idling for three to five minutes
before switching it off.
This time allows the lubricating oil and
the engine coolant to eliminate the
excessive heat from combustion
chamber, bearings, inner components and
turbocharger.
136
STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF
EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the
engine and permits quicker starts in cold
weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F
(-18°C), the engine block heater is
recommended. For ambient
temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the
engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed
under the hood, behind to the driver’s
side headlamp. Follow the steps below to
properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord
(access door on the passenger side wiper
cowl).
2. Pull the cord to the front of the
vehicle and plug it into a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
3. After the vehicle is running, properly
stow away behind access door on the
passenger side wiper cowl.
Note:
The engine block heater cord is a
factory installed option. If your vehicle is
not equipped, heater cords are available
from your authorized dealer.
The engine block heater will require
110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate
the heater element.
The engine block heater must be
plugged in at least 1 hour to have a
warming effect on the engine and at
least 4 hours to have a warming effect
when ambient temperatures are below
-20 F (-29 C)
Warning!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
2.0L GME T4 Engine Break-In
For vehicles equipped with the 2.0L
GME T4, use the following engine
break-in recommendations:
Despite modern technology and World
Class Manufacturing methods, the
moving parts of the engine must still
wear in with each other. This wearing in
occurs mainly during the first 500 miles
(805 km) and continues through the first
oil change interval.
Note: A new engine may consume some
oil during its first few thousand miles
(kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in
period and not interpreted as an
indication of a problem. Please monitor
your oil level during the break-in period
and add oil as required.
137
It is recommended for the operator to
observe the following driving behaviors
during the new vehicle break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 160 km):
Do not allow the engine to operate at
idle for an extended period of time.
Press the accelerator pedal slowly and
not more than halfway to avoid rapid
acceleration.
Avoid aggressive braking.
Drive with the engine speed less than
3500 RPM.
Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph
(88 km) and observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km):
Press the accelerator pedal slowly and
not more than halfway to avoid rapid
acceleration in lower gears (1st to 3rd
gears).
Avoid aggressive braking.
Drive with the engine speed less than
5000 RPM.
Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph
(112 km/h) and observe local speed
limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
Exercise the full engine rpm range,
shifting manually (paddles or gear shift)
at higher rpm’s when possible.
Do not perform sustained operation
with the accelerator pedal at wide open
throttle.
Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph
(136 km/h) and observe local speed
limits.
For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):
Do not participate in track events,
sport driving schools, or similar activities
during the first 1500 miles (2414 km).
Note: Monitor engine oil with every
refueling and add if necessary. Oil and
fuel consumption may be higher through
the first oil change interval.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE
The vehicle is equipped with electric park
brake to guarantee better use and
optimal performance compared to a
manually operated park brake.
The electric parking brake features a
switch located on the center console, a
motor with caliper for each rear wheel,
and an electronic control module.
The electric parking brake can be
engaged in two ways:
Manually, by pulling the switch on the
center console.
Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "Auto
Park Brake" conditions.
07046S0001
Electric Park Brake Switch
138
STARTING AND OPERATING
Note: Normally, the electric parking
brake is engaged automatically when the
engine is stopped. This function can be
deactivated/activated on the
Information and Entertainment system
by selecting the following items in
sequence on the main menu: "Settings",
"Driver Assistance" and "Automatic
Parking Brake".
In addition to engaging the electric park
brake, along with steering and positioning
chocks in front of the wheels (when on a
steep slope), you must always place the
vehicle in the PARK (P) mode before
leaving.
Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the
battery must be replaced in order to
unlock the electric park brake.
Engaging The Park Brake Manually
Briefly pull the switch located on the
center console to manually engage the
electric park brake when the vehicle is
stationary.
Noise may be heard from the rear of the
vehicle when engaging the electric
parking brake.
A slight movement of the brake pedal
may be detected when engaging the
electric parking brake with the brake
pedal pressed.
With the electric parking brake engaged,
the BRAKE warning light on the
instrument panel and the switch will
illuminate.
Caution!
With the Electronic Parking Brake failure
warning light on, some functions of the
electric parking brake are deactivated. In
this case the driver is responsible for brake
activation and vehicle parking in complete
safety conditions.
If, under exceptional circumstances, the
use of the brake is required with the
vehicle in motion, keep the switch on the
center console pulled as long as the brake
action is necessary.
The BRAKE warning light may turn on
with the hydraulic system temporarily
unavailable, in this case braking is
controlled by the motors.
The brake lights will also automatically
turn on in the same way as for normal
braking with the use of the brake pedal.
Release the switch on the center console
to stop the braking action with the
vehicle in motion.
If, through this procedure, the vehicle is
braked until a speed below 1.9 mph
(3 km/h) is reached and the switch is kept
pulled, the park brake will definitively
engage.
Note: Driving the vehicle with the
electric parking brake engaged, or using
it several times to slow down the vehicle,
may cause severe damage to the braking
system.
Disengaging The Electric Park Brake
Manually
In order to manually release the park
brake, the ignition should be in the ON
mode. Press the brake pedal, and then
push the switch on the center console
briefly.
Noise may be heard from the rear of the
vehicle, and a slight movement of the
brake pedal may be detected during
disengagement.
After disengaging the electric parking
brake, the BRAKE warning light on the
instrument panel and the light on the
switch will turn off.
If the BRAKE warning light on the
instrument panel remains on with the
electric parking brake disengaged, this
indicates a fault: in this case, contact an
authorized dealer.
Warning!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or
the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to
139
children. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the park brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the park brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury.
Caution!
Never use gear position PARK (P) instead of
the electric parking brake. Always engage
the electric parking brake when parking the
vehicle to prevent injury or damage caused
by the unexpected movement of the vehicle.
Electric Park Brake Operating Modes
The electric park brake may operate as
follows:
"Dynamic Operating Mode": this mode
is activated by pulling the switch
repeatedly while driving.
"Static Engagement and Release
Mode": with the vehicle stationary, the
electric park brake can be activated by
pulling the switch on the center console
once. On the other hand, push the switch
and the brake pedal at the same time to
disengage the brake.
"Drive Away Release": the electric park
brake will automatically disengage with
the driver side seat belt fastened and the
detection of an action performed by the
driver to move the vehicle (forward gear
or reverse gear). This feature can be
turned on or off in the Information and
Entertainment System.
"Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed is
lower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear
selector is not in PARK (P) position and
the driver's intention of leaving the
vehicle is detected, the electric park
brake will automatically engage to hold
the vehicle in safety conditions.
"Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speed
is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the electric
park brake will automatically engage
when the gear selector is in PARK (P)
position. The light on the switch located
on the center console switches on
together with the BRAKE warning light on
the instrument panel when the park brake
is engaged and applied to the wheels.
Each automatic park brake engagement
can be cancelled by pressing the switch
on the center console and at the same
time moving the gear selector for the
transmission to position PARK (P).
Note: The electric parking brake
automatically engages when the vehicle
is parked on roads with slope of more
than 10%.
Safe Hold
Safe Hold is a safety function that
automatically engages the electric park
brake in the event of a dangerous
condition for the vehicle.
The electric park brake engages
automatically to prevent vehicle
movement if:
The vehicle speed is below 2 mph
(3 km/h).
A transmission operating mode
different from PARK (P) is activated.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
The driver side door is open.
No attempts to apply pressure on the
brake pedal have been detected.
The “Safe Hold” function can be
temporarily disabled by pressing the
switch located on the center console and
the brake pedal at the same time, with
the vehicle stationary and the driver side
door open.
Once disabled, the function will activate
again when the vehicle speed reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled
to STOP and then to ON.
140
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The vehicle can be equipped with an
electronically controlled 8-speed
automatic transmission where gear
shifting automatically takes place,
depending on the vehicle usage
instantaneous parameters (vehicle
speed, grade, and accelerator pedal
position).
The new transmission is an absolute
innovation, as it can match the
Stop/Start system with the traditional
automatic transmissions with built-in
torque converter. For further
information, refer to the “Stop/Start”
section within this chapter.
Manual gear shifting can still occur
thanks to the "sequential mode" position
for the gear selector.
Warning!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the
ignition STOP/OFF. When the ignition is in
the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to children),
and do not leave the ignition in the AVV or ON
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Caution!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE
only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Display
The following information is shown on the
dedicated area of the display:
In Automatic Mode: the active mode
(P, R, N, D) and with "D" the current gear
number.
In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential):
the mode (M), the current gear and the
double or single gear shift request, both
up and down (single or double arrow).
Gear Selector
The gear functioning is controlled by the
gear selector, which can assume the
following positions:
P = PARK
R = REVERSE
N = NEUTRAL
D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed)
07076S0001EM
Gear Display
141
AutoStick: + manually shift to higher
gear; – manually shift to lower gear
The positions diagram is illustrated on
the top of the gear selector.
The letter corresponding to the mode
selected on the gear selector lights up
and appears on the instrument cluster
display.
To select a mode, move the gear selector
forward or backwards, together with
pressing the brake pedal and button to
engage REVERSE (R).
The gear selector is a joystick style
shifting mechanism which returns to the
center position automatically. It can be
pushed forward twice and rearward
twice, based on the starting condition.
The PARK (P) mode can be
enabled/disabled by pushing the PARK
(P) button.
To transition the vehicle into REVERSE
(R) mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or into
DRIVE (D) mode from REVERSE (R)
mode, it is necessary to move the gear
selector by pushing the gear selector
button.
When using AutoStick, activate it by
moving the gear selector from DRIVE (D)
to the left and then forward toward the -
symbol or backward toward the + symbol
and the gear is changed.
To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from
position NEUTRAL (N) to position DRIVE
(D) or REVERSE (R), the vehicle must be
moving at a low speed or stopped, and
the brake pedal must also be pressed.
Note:
DO NOTaccelerate while shifting
from position PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
to another position.
After selecting a gear, wait a few
seconds before accelerating. This
precaution is particularly important with
engine cold.
Transmission Operating Modes
PARK (P)
The transmission is locked in this mode.
The engine can be started in this mode.
Note: Never try to engage PARK (P)
mode when the vehicle is moving. Before
leaving the vehicle, make sure this mode
is engaged (letter P shown on the display
and gear selector) and that the park
brake is engaged.
When parking on a flat surface, first
engage the PARK (P) mode and then
engage the electric park brake.
When parking uphill, before activating
the PARK (P) mode, engage the electric
park brake. Otherwise, it could be
difficult to engage the (P) mode.
07076S0002EM
Gear Selector Center Console
1 — Gear Selector
2 — PARK (P) Button
07076S0005EM
Gear Selector
3 — Gear Selector Button
142
STARTING AND OPERATING
To check that the PARK (P) mode is
actually engaged, make sure (P) is
illuminated on the display and on the gear
selector.
Warning!
Never use the PARK position as a
substitute for the park brake. Always apply
the park brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the
ignition STOP/OFF. When the ignition is in
the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the park brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Caution!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must push the
ignition button to cycle from STOP/OFF
mode to the ON mode, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
DO NOTrace the engine when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear
range, as this can damage the drivetrain.
REVERSE (R)
Select this mode only with the vehicle at
a standstill.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is
standing for prolonged periods with the
engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the electric
park brake and shift the transmission
into PARK (P) if you must leave the
vehicle.
Warning!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You
might lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
DRIVE (D)
Use this mode in normal driving
conditions.
Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or
REVERSE (R) modes must take place
only after releasing the accelerator
pedal, with vehicle at a standstill and
brake pedal pressed.
This mode ensures automatic
engagement of the most suitable gears
for driving needs and maximum fuel
economy in terms of consumption.
In this position, the transmission shifts
the gears automatically, selecting the
most suitable for forward driving among
those available as you go. In this way the
143
vehicle's optimal driving characteristics
are provided for all conditions.
AutoStick
In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for
sport driving, when the vehicle is driven
with a heavy load or on slopes), it is
recommended to use the Autostick
(sequential shifting) mode to select and
keep a lower fixed ratio.
In these conditions, the use of a lower
gear improves vehicle performance,
preventing overheating.
It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D)
mode to sequential mode regardless of
vehicle speed.
Activation
Starting from DRIVE (D), move the
selector to the left (– and + indication of
the trim) to activate the sequential drive
mode. The gear engaged will be shown on
the display.
Shifting is made by moving the gear
selector forwards, towards symbol – or
backwards, towards symbol +.
Steering Wheel Shift Paddles — If
Equipped
The gear can also be manually shifted by
using the paddles behind the steering
wheel. Pull the right paddle (+) toward the
steering wheel and release it to engage a
higher gear, and perform the same
operation with the left paddle (-) to
engage a lower gear.
Note: If only one manual shift is
necessary, the letter (D) will remain on
the display with the engaged gear next to
it.
Deactivation
To deactivate the sequential driving
mode, bring the gear selector back in
position DRIVE (D) ("automatic" driving
mode).
Warning!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
Note:
To select the correct gear for
maximum deceleration (engine brake),
just keep the gear paddle pulled (–): the
transmission goes to an operating mode
in which the vehicle can slow down
easily.
The vehicle will keep the gear
selected by the driver until the safety
conditions allow it.
This means, for example, that the
system will try to prevent the engine
from switching off, automatically
downshifting if the engine speed is too
low.
Automatic Transmission Limp Home
Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If
a condition is detected that could result
in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated.
In this condition, the transmission stays
in fourth gear, regardless of the selected
gear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R)
and NEUTRAL (N) still work.
The
symbol might light up in the
instrument cluster.
07076S0006EM
Steering Wheel Shift Paddles
144
STARTING AND OPERATING
Temporary failure
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all
forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P),
if possible. If not, shift the transmission
to NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition until the
engine turns OFF.
4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then
restart the engine.
5. Shift into the desired gear range. If
the problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
Note: Even if the transmission can be
reset, we recommend that you visit your
authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to
determine if the problem could reoccur. If
the transmission cannot be reset, service
is required at your authorized dealer.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake
Transmission Shift Interlock system
(BTSI) that holds the gear selector in
PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied.
This system prevents you from moving
the gear selector from position PARK (P)
unless the brakes are applied.
To shift the transmission out of PARK (P),
the ignition must be cycled to the AVV
mode (engine running or not) and the
brake pedal must be pressed.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
Disabling
Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing the
vehicle, conveyor vehicle washing
systems) inhibit the automatic activation
of PARK (P) mode when stopping the
engine, or proceed as described below:
1. Vehicle at a standstill.
2. NEUTRAL (N) mode activated.
3. Push the ignition button for at least
three seconds.
The automatic park brake engagement
function when the engine is stopped can
also be deactivated on the Information
and Entertainment system by selecting
the following functions on the main menu:
"Settings", "Driver Assistance" and
"Automatic Parking Brake".
Important Notes
Failure to comply with what is reported
below may damage the transmission:
Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the
vehicle at a standstill.
Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass
from REVERSE to another mode only
with the vehicle at a standstill and engine
idling.
Do not change between PARK (P),
REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D)
modes with engine running at a speed
above idling.
Before activating any transmission
operating mode, fully depress the brake
pedal.
Note: The unexpected movement of the
vehicle can injure the occupants or
people nearby. Do not leave the vehicle
with engine running: before getting out of
the passenger compartment always
engage the electric park brake, select the
PARK (P) mode, stop the engine.
Warning!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
145
vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the
ignition STOP/OFF. When the ignition is in
the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition in the
AVV or ON mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Caution!
Only engage the gear with engine at idling
while fully depressing the brake pedal. If the
transmission temperature exceeds the
normal operating limits, the transmission
control unit may change the gear
engagement order and reduce the drive
torque. If the transmission overheats, it
could operate incorrectly until it cools down.
When using the vehicle with extremely
low external temperatures, the
transmission operation may change
depending on the engine and transmission
temperature, as well as vehicle speed.
Activation of the torque converter clutch
and of the eighth gear is inhibited until the
transmission oil is correctly warmed up.
Complete operation of the transmission will
be enabled as soon as the fluid temperature
reaches the predefined value.
ALFA DNA SELECTOR
Alfa DNA System
This vehicle is equipped with an Alfa DNA
system selector (located on the center
console). There are four modes of
operation to be selected according to
driving style and road conditions:
d = Dynamic (sports driving mode).
n = Natural (mode for driving in normal
conditions).
a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving
mode for maximum fuel savings).
= Adjusts the calibration of the
active suspension (if equipped).
07076S0004BASE
Alfa DNA System Selector
146
STARTING AND OPERATING
The symbol of the active mode lights up
in red on the selector.
On the instrument panel display, the
different modes are characterized by
different colors:
Natural - Blue
Dynamic - Red
Advanced Efficiency - Green
Each driving mode is graphically different
in frame color and contents of each
individual "performance" screen.
Driving Modes
"Natural" Mode
“Natural” Mode is characterized engine
and transmission: standard response.
Activation
It is activated by rotating the selector to
the letter "n", the displays light up in blue.
The "Performance" screen graphically
reproduces some parameters closely
linked to the efficiency of the driving
style, with a view to limiting consumption.
"Dynamic" Mode
Activation
It is activated by rotating the selector to
the letter "d", the displays light up in red.
ESC and ASR systems: intervention
thresholds that ensure more enjoyable,
sportier driving while guaranteeing the
stability of the vehicle.
Engine and transmission: adoption of
sports mapping.
Warning!
In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the
accelerator pedal increases considerably.
Consequently, driving is less fluid and
comfortable.
07076S0003EM
Mode Display
07116S0002EM
Natural Mode
07116S0001EM
Natural Mode Performance Display
07116S0003EM
Dynamic Mode
147
The "Performance" screen displays
parameters related to vehicle stability,
the graphs illustrate the trend of the
longitudinal/lateral accelerations
(G-meter information), considering
gravity acceleration as a reference unit.
Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed
on the right.
"Advanced Efficiency" Mode
Activation
It is activated by rotating the selector to the
letter "a", the displays light up in green.
ESC and ASR systems: intervention
thresholds aimed at ensuring maximum
safety in low-grip driving conditions. It is
advisable to select "Advanced Efficiency"
mode in the presence of low-grip road
surfaces.
“Advanced Efficiency” Mode is
characterized by reduced engine
performance and ECO shifting strategy
for the automatic transmission.
The "Performance" screen graphically
displays some parameters closely
related to the vehicle consumption.
07116S0006EM
Dynamic Mode Performance Display
07116S0005EM
Advanced Efficiency Mode
07116S0008EM
Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance
Display
148
STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Mode Deactivation
To deactivate any driving mode, simply
move the selector to any other mode.
Note:
When the engine is next started, the
"Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" and
"Natural" mode selected previously is
retained. The system will reactivate in
"Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" or
"Natural" mode, depending on which
mode was selected before the engine
was stopped.
When the engine is next started, the
"Race" mode selected previously is not
retained. The system will reactivate in
"Dynamic" mode.
It is not possible to go directly from
"Dynamic" mode to "Advanced
Efficiency" mode and vice versa. You
must always activate the “Natural” mode
first and then select the other mode.
ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION
(AAS) — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle's electronic suspension
management system is the result of a
sophisticated elaboration of the various
sensors, aimed at optimizing the vehicle's
performance.
The system continuously monitors the
damping of the suspension through the
actuator installed on each shock
absorber. The calibration of the shock
absorbers can be adjusted to the
conditions of the road surface and to the
dynamic conditions of the vehicle,
improving its comfort and road handling.
The driver can choose, while driving, (only
in "Dynamic” mode), between two types
of suspension calibration: a more sporty
or a more comfortable one.
By pressing the button, the system
prepares the shock absorber calibration
in order to favor driving comfort.
In case of a system failure, the symbol
and a dedicated message will be
shown on the instrument panel display.
04306S0001BASE
“Alfa DNA” System Selector
149
STOP/START SYSTEM
Stop/Start System
The Stop/Start system automatically
shuts off the engine during a vehicle stop
if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal will automatically restart the
engine.
The function was developed to increase
vehicle efficiency by reducing fuel
consumption, gas emissions, and sound
pollution.
Operating Mode
Stopping the Engine
With vehicle at a standstill and brake
pedal pressed, the engine switches off if
the gear selector is in a position other
than REVERSE (R).
The system does not operate when the
gear selector is in REVERSE (R), in order
to making parking maneuvers easier.
In the event of stops uphill, engine
switching off is disabled to make the "Hill
Start Assist" function available (works
only with running engine).
NOTE: The engine can only be
automatically stopped after having run at
about 6 mph (10 km/h). After an
automatic restart, the vehicle only needs
to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h)
to stop the engine.
Engine stopping is signaled by the
symbol lighting up on the instrument
cluster display.
Restarting the Engine
To restart the engine, release the brake
pedal.
With the brake pressed and the
transmission in automatic mode DRIVE
(D), the engine will restart by shifting to
REVERSE (R), to PARK (P) or to
"AutoStick".
With brake pressed if the gear selector is
in "AutoStick" mode, the engine will
restart by shifting to PARK (P) or by
moving the selector to + or -.
System Manual Activation/
Deactivation
To manually activate/deactivate the
system, push the button located in the
control panel on the left of the steering
wheel.
System Activation
The activation of the system is indicated
by the
symbol lighting up on the
display. In this condition, the light on the
button is off.
System Deactivation
A message will appear on the display
when the system is deactivated. In this
condition, the light on the button is on.
Note: Each time the engine is started,
the system is activated regardless of
where was when it was previously
switched off.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
For higher comfort and increased safety,
and to reduce emissions, there are
certain conditions where the engine will
not autostop despite the system being
active, such as:
Engine still cold.
Especially cold outside temperature.
Battery not sufficiently charged.
Driver's door not shut.
Driver's seat belt not fastened.
Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parking
maneuvers).
With the automatic climate control
active, an adequate cabin heating or
cooling comfort has not been reached or
with MAX-DEF function active.
07126S0051EM
Stop/Start Button
150
STARTING AND OPERATING
During the first period of use, to
initialize the system.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
Engine Restarting Conditions
Due to comfort, emission control and
safety reasons, the engine can restart
automatically without any action by the
driver, under special conditions, such as:
Battery not sufficiently charged.
Reduced braking system vacuum (e.g.
if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly).
Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on
roads with a grade).
Engine stopping by the Stop/Start
system for more than approx. three
minutes.
With the automatic climate control
active, an adjustment in cabin heating or
cooling is made or with MAX-DEF
function active.
Safety Functions
When the engine is stopped through the
Stop/Start system, if the driver releases
their seat belt, opens the driver's or
passenger's door, or opens the hood from
inside the vehicle, the engine can be
restarted only by using the ignition.
This condition is indicated to the driver
both through a buzzer and a message on
the instrument cluster display.
Irregular Operation
In the event of malfunction, the
Stop/Start system is deactivated.
For failure indications, see the "Warning
Lights and Messages" paragraph,
"Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel"
chapter.
Vehicle Inactivity
In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the
battery is replaced), special attention
must be paid to the disconnection of the
battery power supply.
Proceed as follows:
Remove connector from socket to
disconnect sensor (battery status
monitoring) installed on the negative pole
of the battery. This sensor should never
be disconnected from the pole except if
the battery is replaced.
Note: After setting the ignition to STOP
and having closed the driver side door,
wait at least one minute before
disconnecting the electrical supply from
the battery. When reconnecting the
electrical supply to the battery, make
sure that the ignition is in the STOP mode
and the driver side door is closed.
07126S0002EM
Battery Power Supply
1 — Socket
2 — Sensor
3 — Connector
151
SPEED LIMITER
Description
This feature allows the speed of the
vehicle to be limited to speeds, which can
be set by the driver.
The maximum speed can be set with the
vehicle stationary or in motion. The
minimum speed that can be set is 18 mph
(30mk/h).
When this feature is active, the vehicle
speed depends on the pressing of the
accelerator pedal until the programmed
speed limit is reached (see "Speed Limit
Programming" paragraph).
Activation
The feature can be activated/
deactivated through the Information and
Entertainment System.
Activating The Device
To access this feature on the main menu,
select the following items in sequence:
"Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and
“ON”.
The activation of this feature is signaled
by the displaying of the green symbol
along with the last speed set. The Speed
Limiter feature can remain active
concurrently with the Speed Control
system. If a speed limit below the one
indicated in the Speed Control is
selected, the Speed Control speed will be
lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. This
function remains available in RACE mode.
Speed Limit Programming
The speed limit can be programmed
through the Information and
Entertainment System.
To access the function on the main menu,
select the following items in sequence:
"Settings", "Safety" and "Speed Limiter
Set Speed".
By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed
increases by 5 mph (5 km/h), from a
minimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to a
maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h).
Exceeding The Programmed Speed
By fully pressing the accelerator pedal,
the programmed speed can be exceeded
even with the device active (e.g. in the
event of overtaking).
The device is disabled until the speed
drops below the set limit, after which it
reactivates automatically.
Programmed Speed Icon Flashing
The programmed speed will flash in the
following scenarios:
When the accelerator pedal has been
fully pressed and the vehicle has
exceeded the programmed speed.
Activating the system after setting a
limit below the effective speed of the
vehicle.
In the event of overtake acceleration.
Deactivation
The feature can be activated/
deactivated through the Information and
Entertainment System.
Deactivating The Device
To access this feature on the main menu,
select the following items in sequence:
"Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and
“OFF”.
Automatic Deactivation Of The Device
The device deactivates automatically in
the event of fault in the system. In this
case, contact an authorized dealer.
Temporary Signal Loss
When the devices loses the signal, the
white symbol without the speed
indication illuminates on the display.
System Failure
If there is a system failure, the amber
symbol
illuminates on the display.
07136S0001EM
Speed Limiter Display
152
STARTING AND OPERATING
SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE
CONTROL)
Speed Control Description
This is an electronically controlled driving
assistance feature that allows the
desired vehicle speed to be maintained,
without having to press the accelerator
pedal. This feature can be used at a speed
above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long
stretches of dry, straight roads with few
variations (highways).
The speed control buttons are located on
the left side of the steering wheel.
Note:
To ensure correct operation, the
speed control is designed to deactivate
if more than one function is operated
simultaneously. In this case, the system
can be reactivated by pushing the on/off
button
and setting the desired
speed.
It is not recommended to use this
feature in city traffic.
While driving downhill, the system could
brake the vehicle to keep the set speed
the same.
Warning!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
Activating
To activate the Speed Control System,
push the on/off button location on the
left side of the steering wheel.
The activation of the system is signaled
by the white warning light
illuminating
on the instrument cluster.
The Speed Control function can remain
active at the same time as the Speed
Limiter System. If the set speed is higher
than the speed set with the Speed
Limiter, the set speed will be lowered to
that of the Speed Limiter.
Note: The system cannot be engaged in
FIRST or REVERSE gear. It is advisable to
engage it in THIRD gear or higher if using
the Autostick feature.
Warning!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you are not using it.
Setting The Desired Speed
To set a desired speed, proceed as
follows:
1. Turn the Speed Control on.
2. When the vehicle has reached the
desired speed, push the SET switch up or
down and release to activate. When the
accelerator is released, the vehicle will
maintain the selected speed
automatically.
07146S0001EM
Speed Control On/Off Switch
153
If needed (when overtaking for instance),
you can accelerate beyond the set speed
by pressing the accelerator. When you
release the pedal, the vehicle will return
to the previously set speed.
When traveling downhill with the system
active, the vehicle speed may slightly
exceed the set one.
Note: Before pushing the SET switch, the
vehicle must be traveling at a constant
speed on a flat surface.
Increasing/Decreasing Speed
Increasing Speed
Once the Speed Control has been
activated, the speed can be increased by
pushing the SET switch upward.
By keeping the switch pushed, the set
speed will increase until the switch is
released. The new speed will then be set.
At every movement of the SET switch,
the set speed can be adjusted.
Decreasing Speed
When the system is active, to reduce the
speed, push the SET switch downward.
By keeping the switch pushed, the set
speed will decrease until the switch is
released. The new speed will then be set.
At every movement of the SET switch,
the set speed can be adjusted.
Note: Moving the SET switch allows to
adjust the speed according to the
selected unit of measurement set on the
Information and Entertainment System
(see dedicated supplement).
Accelerating When Overtaking
Press the accelerator as you would
normally. When the pedal is released, the
vehicle will return to the set speed.
Use Of The Feature On Hilly Routes
The system can automatically downshift
to keep the set speed when driving on
hilly routes.
On steep grades, the loss or gain in speed
may be considerable and is advisable to
deactivate the Speed Control.
Note: The system keeps the speed set
even uphill and downhill. A slight variation
in the speed on slight rises is completely
normal.
Recalling The Speed
Once the system has been deactivated,
but not canceled, the previously set
speed can be recalled by pushing the RES
button and removing your foot from the
accelerator. The system will be set to the
last stored speed.
Note: Before resuming the previously
set speed, you must accelerate to a
speed close to that speed.
In Autostick (sequential) mode, before
resuming the previously set speed, you
should accelerate until you are close to
that speed. Then, push and release the
RES button.
07146S0002EM
SET Switch Location
07146S0003EM
Resume Button Location
154
STARTING AND OPERATING
Deactivating
Lightly pressing the brake pedal
deactivates the speed control without
deleting the set speed.
The speed control may also be
deactivated by applying the electric park
brake or when the braking system is
operated (e.g. operation of the ESC
system).
The set speed is deleted in the following
cases:
Pushing the on/off button a second
time.
The ignition is cycled to STOP.
If there is a malfunction with the
Speed Control.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC) — IF EQUIPPED
System Description
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a
driver assist system that combines the
speed control functions with controlling
the distance from the vehicle ahead.
The system allows to set and hold the
vehicle at the desired speed without
needing to press the accelerator. It also
allows to set and hold a distance from the
vehicle ahead (these settings are set by
the driver).
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) uses a
radar sensor located behind the front
bumper and a camera located in the
center/upper part of the windshield, to
detect the presence of a vehicle close
ahead.
This system enhances driving comfort
while on the highway or out of town with
light traffic.
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle
ahead, the system will maintain a fixed
set speed.
If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the
system automatically intervenes by
braking (or accelerating) slightly in order
not to exceed the original set speed, so
that the vehicle keeps the preset
distance, seeking to adapt to the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
Note: Adaptive Cruise Control
performance is not guaranteed under the
06016S0003B
Front Bumper Radar Location
06016S0004B
Windshield Camera Location
155
following circumstances, and it is
recommended to turn the system off
when:
Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow.
Driving in heavy traffic or
construction zones.
Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads,
roads with steep climbs and descents, or
roads with numerous turns and bends.
Entering a turn lane.
When circumstances do not allow
safe driving at a constant speed.
Warning!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a
convenience system. It is not a substitute
for active driving involvement. It is always
the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention
is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled
vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be limited
upon adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in wrong
or missing distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold the
vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the
stop position. If the target vehicle does not
start moving within 3 minutes the parking
brake will be activated, and the ACC system
will be canceled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway
construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have
steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
Activation/Deactivation
The system has four operating states:
Enabled (speed not set)
Activated (speed set)
Paused
Deactivated
Enabling/Activating
To enable the system, push and release
the
button located on the left side on
the steering wheel.
When the system is enabled and ready to
operate, the display shows the white icon
above dashes in place of the speed.
Setting a speed activates the system.
The display shows the icon in green with
the set speed.
07146S0010EM
On/Off Button
07146S0016EM
Enabled Icons
156
STARTING AND OPERATING
Warning!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave
the system off when you are not using it.
Pausing/Deactivating
With the feature enabled (speed not set),
push the
button to disable.
With the feature active (speed set), push
the
button to pause. The display will
show the icon in white with the speed in
brackets. To deactivate the feature, push
the
button a second time.
Setting The Desired Speed
The speed can be set from a minimum of
20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of
110 mph (180 km/h).
When the vehicle reaches the desired
speed, push the SET switch upward or
downward and release it to activate the
system. When the accelerator is released,
the vehicle will maintain the set speed
automatically.
While the accelerator pedal is pressed,
the system will not be able to control the
distance between the vehicle and the one
ahead. In this case, the speed will be
determined only by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
The system will return to normal
operation as soon as the accelerator
pedal is released.
The system cannot be set:
When pressing the brake pedal.
When the brakes are overheated.
When the electric park brake has been
operated.
When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R) or
NEUTRAL (N) is engaged.
When the engine rpm is above a
maximum threshold.
When the vehicle speed is not within
the operational speed range.
When the ESC (or ABS or other
stability control systems) are operating
or have just operated.
When the ESC system is off.
When the Forward Collision Warning
system (if equipped) is braking
automatically.
In the event of system failure.
When the engine is OFF.
In case of obstruction of the radar
sensor (in this case the bumper area
where it is located must be cleaned).
If the system is set, the conditions
described above also cause a
cancellation or deactivation of the
system. These situations may vary
according to the conditions.
Note: The system will not be deactivated
when speeds higher than those set are
reached by pressing the accelerator
pedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). In
these situations, the system may not
work correctly and it is recommended to
deactivate it.
07146S0017EM
SET Switch
157
To Vary The Speed Setting
Increasing Speed
Once the system has been activated, you
can increase the speed by pushing the
SET switch upward. Each time the switch
is pushed, the speed increases by 1 mph.
By pushing and holding the switch
upward, the set speed will increase in
increments of 5 mph until the switch is
released. Then, the new speed will be set.
Decreasing Speed
Once the system has been activated, you
can decrease the speed by pushing the
SET switch downward. Each time the
switch is pushed, the speed decreases by
1 mph.
By pushing and holding the switch
downward, the set speed will decrease in
increments of 5 mph until the switch is
released. Then, the new speed will be set.
Note:
Moving the SET switch allows you to
adjust the speed according to the
selected unit of measurement ("US" or
"Metric") set on the Information and
Entertainment System (see dedicated
supplement).
When the unit of measurement is set
to Metric, pushing and holding the SET
switch will adjust the speed in 10 km/h
increments.
By keeping the accelerator pedal
depressed, the vehicle can continue to
accelerate beyond the set speed. In this
case, use the SET switch to set the
speed to the vehicle’s current speed.
When you push the SET button to
reduce the speed, the braking system
intervenes automatically if the engine
brake does not slow the vehicle down
sufficiently to reach the set speed. The
device holds the set speed uphill and
downhill; however a slight variation is
entirely normal, particularly on slight
inclines.
The transmission could shift to a
lower gear when driving downhill, or
when accelerating. This is normal and
necessary to maintain the set speed
The system will disable while driving
if the brakes overheat.
Accelerating When Overtaking
When driving with ACC activated and
following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to
the ACC set speed to assist in passing the
vehicle. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
The system detects the direction of
traffic automatically when the vehicle
passes from left-hand traffic to
right-hand traffic. In this case, the
overtaking assist function is only active
when the reference vehicle is overtaken
on the right. The additional acceleration
is deactivated when the driver uses the
right direction indicator and returns to
the original lane.
Resuming The Speed
Once the system has been canceled but
not deactivated, to resume a previously
set speed, simply push the RES button
and remove your foot from the
accelerator to recall it.
The system will be set to the last stored
speed.
158
STARTING AND OPERATING
Before returning to the previously set
speed, bring the speed close to that
value, then push the RES button and
release it.
Warning!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
Setting The Distance Between Vehicles
The distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead may be set to one bar
(short), two bars (medium), three bars
(long), or four bars (maximum).
The distances from the vehicle ahead are
proportional to speed.
The interval of time with relation to the
vehicle ahead remains constant and
varies from one second (for the short
distance one-bar setting) to two seconds
(for the maximum distance four-bar
setting).
The set distance is shown on the display
by a dedicated icon.
The setting is four (maximum) the first
time the system is used. After the
distance has been modified by the driver,
the new distance will be stored also after
the system is deactivated and
reactivated.
To Decrease The Distance
Push and release the distance button to
decrease the distance setting. The
distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter) every time the button is pushed.
The set speed is held if there are no
vehicles ahead. Once the shortest
distance has been selected, the next push
of the button will set the maximum
distance.
If a slower vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the vehicle icon on the display
illuminates from grey to white. The
system automatically adjusts the
vehicle’s speed to keep the set distance,
independently of the set speed.
07146S0018EM
RES (Resume) Button
07146S0019EM
Distance Icons
07146S0015EM
Distance Button
159
The vehicle holds the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a
speed higher than the set speed.
The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or
the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise
Control system sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The Adaptive Cruise Control system is
deactivated/paused.
Warning!
The maximum breaking applied by the
system is limited. The driver may apply the
brakes in all cases if needed.
If the system predicts that the braking
level is insufficient to hold the set distance,
either “BRAKE!” or a dedicated message is
displayed to warn the driver of approaching
the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also
emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake
immediately as necessary to hold a safe
distance from the vehicle ahead.
The driver is responsible for ensuring that
there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or
objectives along the direction of the vehicle.
Failure to comply with these precautions
may cause serious accidents and injuries.
The driver is fully responsible for holding
a safe distance from the vehicle ahead
respecting the highway code in force in the
respective country.
“Stop And Go” Function
The “Stop and Go” operating strategy
allows you to maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead until the vehicle
has completely stopped. It will also
restart the vehicle automatically if the
vehicle ahead drives away within two
seconds, otherwise it is necessary to
press the accelerator pedal or push the
RES button to restart.
Warning!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated and the set
speed is canceled if:
The (on/off) button is pushed (when
the system is on or paused).
The ignition is cycled to STOP.
The system is canceled (the set speed
and distance are stored):
When the system is paused (Refer to
the “Activation / Deactivation” section).
When the conditions shown in the
“Setting The Desired Speed” section
occur.
Limited Operation Warning
If the dedicated message is shown on the
display, a condition limiting the Adaptive
Cruise Control operation may have
occurred.
This could be due to an obstruction of the
vehicle’s sensor or camera. It could also
be due to a fault in the system. If an
obstruction is detected, clean the area of
the windshield opposite the interior rear
view mirror, where the camera is located,
as well as the area of the front bumper
where the sensor is located. Then check
that the message has disappeared.
When the conditions limiting the system
functions end, normal operation will
resume.
Should the fault persist, contact an
authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving
The system may not work correctly in
some driving conditions (see below). The
driver must control the vehicle at all
times.
Vehicle Not Aligned
The system may not detect a vehicle
traveling in the same lane, in the same
direction, but is not aligned. It also may
not detect a vehicle which is cutting in
from a side lane. Sufficient distance from
the vehicles ahead may not be
guaranteed in these cases.
160
STARTING AND OPERATING
The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and
out of the driving lane causing the vehicle
to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Steering And Curves
Driving on curves with the system set
could limit speed and acceleration to
guarantee vehicle stability, even if no
vehicles are detected ahead.
When leaving the curve, the system
resets the previously set speed.
Note:
In cases of narrow curves, the
performance of the system could be
limited. In this case, it is advisable to
deactivate the system.
The system only limits the speed
DURING a bend and not BEFORE it.
Using The System On Slopes
When driving on roads with a variable
incline, the system may not detect the
presence of a vehicle in the lane. System
performance could be limited according
to speed, load, traffic conditions and
steep slopes.
Lane Change
The system may not detect the presence
of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane.
In this case, sufficient distance from the
vehicle which is changing lanes may not
be guaranteed. It is advisable to pay the
utmost attention at all times and be
always ready to apply the brakes if
needed.
Small Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and
motorcycles) traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or which enter the lane
from curb side are not detected until they
are fully in the lane.
Sufficient distance from the vehicles
ahead may not be guaranteed in these
cases.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
The system cannot detect the presence
of stationary vehicles or objects. For
example, the system will not operate if
the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a
vehicle ahead of that one is stationary in
that lane. Pay the utmost attention at all
times and be always ready to apply the
brakes if needed.
07146S0011EM
Steering And Curves
07146S0012EM
Lane Change
07146S0013EM
Small Vehicles
161
Objects And Vehicles Moving In
Opposite Or Crosswise Direction
The system cannot detect the presence
of objects or vehicles traveling in
opposite or crosswise directions and
consequently will not activate.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on
radio frequency that comply with Part
15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with
Industry Canada Standards RSS-
GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these
systems by other than an authorized
service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
PARK SENSORS SYSTEM
Vehicles With Rear Sensors Only
The parking sensors, located in the rear
bumper, detect obstacles while the
vehicle is in REVERSE. When an obstacle
is detected, an acoustic alert will sound
and visual indications will be displayed on
the instrument cluster.
Engagement/Disengagement
To turn the system off, push the Park
Sensors System button located to the
left of the headlight switch. The indicator
light within the button will illuminate
when the system is turned off. Pushing
the button a second time will turn the
system back on, and the indicator light
will turn off.
06016V0008EM
Objects And Vehicles Moving In
Opposite Or Crosswise Direction
07176S0001B
Rear Sensor Location
162
STARTING AND OPERATING
The indicator light within the Park
Sensors System switch will also be on in
case of system failure. If the switch is
pushed with a system failure, the
indicator light will flash for
approximately five seconds. The light will
then stay on constantly.
Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON,
the Park Sensors System keeps the last
state when the engine was stopped
(activated or deactivated) in its memory.
System Activation/Deactivation
The system, when engaged, is
automatically activated by engaging the
REVERSE gear. It is deactivated by
engaging another gear.
Acoustic Signal
When REVERSE is engaged and there is
an obstacle behind the vehicle, an
acoustic signal with variable frequency
will sound.
The acoustic signal increases in
frequency as the distance between the
vehicle and the obstacle decreases.
The acoustic signal becomes
continuous when the distance between
the vehicle and the obstacle is less than
11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the
distance increases.
The acoustic signal is constant if the
distance between the vehicle and the
obstacle is unchanged.
Note: If several obstacles are detected
by the sensors, only the nearest one is
considered.
Indication On Display
The driver can select the type of warning
they would like to be displayed through
the Information and Entertainment
System. To access the function on the
main menu, select in the following order:
1. “Settings.”
2. “Driver Assistance.”
3. “ParkSense.”
4. “Mode.”
5. “Sound-Display.”
Visual Indications
The system indicates the presence of an
obstacle by displaying a single red arc in
the detected area, in relation to the
distance of the object and the position of
the vehicle.
If the obstacle is detected in the rear
central area, a single red arc will be
displayed as the obstacle approaches,
first constant, then flashing, in addition
to an acoustic signal.
If the obstacle is detected in the rear left
and/or right area, a single red flashing arc
will be shown in the corresponding area
on the display and the system will emit an
acoustic signal, either at frequent
intervals or constantly.
In general, the vehicle is closer to the
obstacle when a single red flashing arc is
shown on the display and the acoustic
signal becomes continuous.
If several obstacles are detected
simultaneously in the rear area, the
display will show all of them, regardless
of the area in which they were detected.
It is not possible to exit from the display
screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE.
07176S0052EM
Park Sensors System On/Off Switch
163
Fault Indication
Parking sensor faults, if any, will be
indicated when REVERSE is engaged by a
message on the instrument cluster
display. Refer to "Warning Lights And
Messages" in "Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel" for further
information.
Messages On The Display
In case of system failure, a dedicated
message appears on the instrument
cluster for about five seconds.
Cleaning The Sensors: If the display
shows a message requiring the sensors
to be cleaned, make sure that the outer
surface and the underside of the rear
bumper is free of debris (e.g. snow, mud,
ice, etc.). Once these areas are clear,
cycle the ignition to the STOP position.
Then, return it to ON position. If the
message is still displayed, contact an
authorized dealer.
Audio System Not Available: If the
display shows a message that the audio
system is not available, it means that the
acoustic signal will be emitted by the
instrument panel, and not through the
vehicles speakers.
Note: Some conditions may influence
the performance of the Park Sensors
System:
Reduced sensor sensitivity could be
due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or
thick paint on the surface of the sensor.
The sensors may detect a false
obstacle (echo interference) due to
mechanical interference, for example
when washing the vehicle or in extreme
weather.
The signals sent by the sensors can
be altered by the presence of ultrasonic
systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems
of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the
vehicle.
System performance can be
influenced by the position of the
sensors. For example, due to a change in
the ride setting (caused by wear to the
shock absorbers or suspension), by
changing tires, overloading the vehicle or
operations that require the vehicle to be
lowered.
Be sure not to place bumper stickers
or other adhesives over the sensors as
this will affect system performance.
Warning!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Parking Sensor system.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your
surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Caution!
The Parking Sensor system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize
every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close
proximity
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using the Parking Sensor system in order to
be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
detected. It is recommended that the driver
looks over his/her shoulder when using the
Parking Sensor system.
164
STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicles With Front And Rear Sensors
The parking sensors, located in the front
and rear bumpers, detect the presence of
any obstacles and warn the driver
through an acoustic signal and visual
indications will be displayed on the
instrument cluster.
Engagement/Disengagement
To turn the system off, push the Park
Sensors System switch located to the
left of the headlight switch. The indicator
light within the switch will illuminate
when the system is turned off. Pushing
the switch a second time will turn the
system back on, and the indicator light
will turn off.
The indicator light within the Park
Sensors System switch will also be on in
case of system failure. If the switch is
pushed with a system failure, the
indicator light will flash for
approximately five seconds. The light will
then stay on constantly.
Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON,
the Park Sensors system keeps the last
state when the engine was stopped
(activated or deactivated) in its memory.
System Activation/Deactivation
When the REVERSE gear is engaged and
the system is on, the front and rear
sensors are activated. If the vehicle
moves from REVERSE to a forward gear,
the rear sensors are deactivated, while
the front sensors remain active until the
speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded.
Note: In certain operating conditions, the
system could start detecting an obstacle
only after the vehicle has moved slightly
(a few inches).
Acoustic Signal
In the presence of an obstacle at the
front or the rear of the vehicle, an
acoustic signal with variable frequency
will sound:
The acoustic signal increases in
frequency as the distance between the
vehicle and the obstacle decreases.
The acoustic signal becomes
continuous when the distance between
the vehicle and the obstacle is less than
11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the
distance increases.
The acoustic signal is constant if the
distance between the vehicle and the
obstacle is unchanged.
Note: If the sensors detect several front
and rear obstacles, the closest obstacle
is considered. An intermittent signal will
sound if the obstacles are at the same
distance (front and rear).
When the system emits an acoustic
signal, the volume of the Information and
Entertainment System, if activated, is
automatically lowered.
07176S0003B
Front Sensor Location
07176S0001B
Rear Sensor Location
165
Indication On Display
The driver can select the type of warning
they would like to be displayed through
the Information and Entertainment
System. To access the function on the
main menu, select in the following order:
1. “Settings.”
2. “Driver Assistance.”
3. “ParkSense.”
4. “Mode.”
5. “Sound-Display.”
Visual Indications
The system indicates the presence of an
obstacle by displaying a single red arc in
the detected areas, in relation to the
distance of the object and the position of
the vehicle.
If the obstacle is detected in the front or
rear central area, a single red arc will be
displayed as the obstacle approaches,
first constant, then flashing, in addition
to an acoustic signal.
If the obstacle is detected in the front or
rear left and/or right area, a single red
flashing arc will be shown in the
corresponding area on the display and
the system will emit an acoustic signal,
either at frequent intervals or constantly.
If several obstacles are detected
simultaneously in the front and rear area,
the display will show all of them,
regardless of the area in which they were
detected.
In general, the vehicle is closer to the
obstacle when a single or several flashing
arcs are shown on the display and the
acoustic signal becomes continuous.
It is not possible to exit from the display
screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Fault Indication
Parking sensor faults, if any, will be
indicated by a message on the display on
the instrument cluster. Refer to "Warning
Lights And Messages" in "Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel" for further
information.
Messages On The Display
In case of system failure, a dedicated
message appears on the instrument
cluster for about five seconds.
Cleaning The Front Or Rear Sensors:
If the display shows a message requiring
the sensors to be cleaned, make sure that
the outer surface and the underside of
the front and rear bumpers are free of
debris (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once
these areas are clear, cycle the ignition to
STOP. Then, return it to ON mode. If the
message is still displayed, contact an
authorized dealer.
Audio System Not Available: If the
display shows a message that the audio
system is not available, it means that the
acoustic signal will be emitted by the
instrument panel, and not through the
vehicles speakers.
Note: Some conditions may influence
the performance of the Park Sensors
System:
Reduced sensor sensitivity could be
due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or
thick paint on the surface of the sensor.
The sensors may detect a false
obstacle (echo interference) due to
mechanical interference, for example
when washing the vehicle or in extreme
weather.
The signals sent by the sensors can
be altered by the presence of ultrasonic
systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems
of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the
vehicle.
System performance can be
influenced by the position of the
sensors. For example, due to a change in
the ride setting (caused by wear to the
shock absorbers or suspension), by
changing tires, overloading the vehicle or
operations that require the vehicle to be
lowered.
Be sure not to place bumper stickers
or other adhesives over the sensors as
this will affect system performance.
166
STARTING AND OPERATING
Warning!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Parking Sensor system.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your
surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Caution!
The Parking Sensor system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize
every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close
proximity
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using the Parking Sensor system in order to
be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
detected. It is recommended that the driver
looks over his/her shoulder when using the
Parking Sensor system.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
(LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Description
The Lane Departure Warning system uses
a forward looking camera located on the
windshield to detect lane markings and
measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When one or both lane limits are
detected and the vehicle passes over one
without an activated turn signal, the
system emits a visual as well as an
audible signal.
If the vehicle continues to go beyond the
line of the lane without any intervention
from the driver, the surpassed line will
light up on the display (left or right) to
urge the driver to bring the vehicle back
into the limits of the lane.
Caution!
Do not tamper with nor operate on the
camera. Do not close the openings in the
aesthetic cover located under the interior
rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of
the camera, contact your authorized dealer.
The camera may have limited or absent
operation due to weather conditions such
as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow,
formation of ice layers on the windshield.
Camera operation may also be
compromised by the presence of dust,
condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield,
by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are
driving not aligned with yours, vehicle
driving in a transverse or opposite way on
the same lane, bend with a small radius of
curvature), by road surface conditions and
by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving).
Make sure the windshield is always clean.
Use specific detergents and clean cloths to
avoid scratching the windshield. The camera
operation may also be limited or absent in
some driving, traffic and road surface
conditions.
If the windshield must be replaced due to
scratches, chipping or breakage, contact
exclusively your authorized dealer. Do not
replace the windshield on your own. It is
advisable to replace the windshield if it is
damaged in the area of the camera.
167
System Activation/Deactivation
The system is activated/deactivated by
pushing the button located on the end of
the multifunction lever.
Note: When the engine is started, the
system maintains the operating mode
that was selected when it was turned
OFF.
Activation Conditions
Once turned on, the system becomes
active only if the following conditions are
met:
The vehicle speed is above 37 mph
(60 km/h).
The lane limit lines are visible at least
on one side.
There are suitable visibility conditions.
The road is straight or with wide radius
bends.
A suitable distance is kept from the
vehicle in front.
The turn signal is not active.
Symbols And Messages On The Display
The Lane Departure Warning system
advises the driver when the vehicle
leaves the driving lane by showing
symbols and messages on the instrument
cluster display.
When the system is active and the lane
limits have not been detected, the display
shows a grey vehicle icon with two grey
lines.
Exiting A Lane With Detection Of A
Single Limit
When the system is active and only, for
example, the left lane limit has been
detected, the detected lane illuminates in
white on the display; the system is ready
to provide visual warnings on the display
in the event of unintentional exiting of
the lane (turn signal not activated) to the
left.
07226S0001EM
Lane Departure Warning System
Activation/Deactivation Button
07226S0002EM
Vehicle Changing Lanes
07226S0007EM
Lane Limits Not Detected
07226S0003EM
Left Lane Limit Detected
168
STARTING AND OPERATING
When the system detects that the vehicle
has approached the lane line and is about
to pass it, the left line on the display
illuminates in yellow.
The system operates in the same way,
but mirrored, in the event of exiting the
right lane when only the right lane limit
has been detected.
Exiting A Lane With Detection Of Both
Limits
When the system is active, both lane lines
on the display illuminate in white to
indicate the successful detection of both
limits.
When lane limits are detected, the
system is ready to provide indications in
case the driver unintentionally leaves the
lane (turn signal not activated).
As the Lane Departure Warning system
detects the lane limits while the vehicle is
in motion, it will adjust the display
accordingly (from white to yellow and
vice versa, and increase their thickness).
If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by
an audible signal as well as the visual
indication in the instrument cluster. The
signal is emitted through the speakers on
the side of the lane limit which is being
crossed (eg. if the vehicle is exceeding
the left line of the lane, the audible signal
will come from the speakers on the left of
the vehicle).
Changing The System Settings
The system's sensitivity can be set
through the Information and
Entertainment System. Sensitivity “High”
or “Low” can be selected.
To access the function, from the main
menu select the following in order:
1. “Settings.”
2. “Safety.”
3. “Lane Departure Warning.”
4. “Sensitivity.”
07226S0004EM
Left Lane Limit Approached
07226S0005EM
Both Lane Limits Detected
07226S0006EM
Right Lane Limit Approached
169
Limited Operation Warning
If a message appears on the display, a
condition limiting the Lane Departure
Warning system operation may have
occurred. This could be an obstruction of
the camera view, or a fault in the system.
If an obstruction is detected, clean the
area of the windshield by the interior rear
view mirror.
Although the vehicle can still be driven in
normal conditions, the system may not
function properly.
When the conditions limiting the system
are corrected, it will go back to normal
operation. Should a fault persist, contact
your authorized dealer.
System Failure Warning
If the system turns off and the warning
light
appears on the display, it means
that there is a system fault.
In this case, it is still possible to drive the
vehicle, but you are advised to contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
REAR BACK-UP CAMERA /
DYNAMIC GRIDLINES
Description
The Rear Back-Up Camera is located just
under the vehicle’s trunk lid, above the
rear license plate.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
Information and Entertainment System
display will show the area behind the
vehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-Up
Camera, along with a warning message.
Rear Back-Up Camera Features
To activate the Rear Back-Up Camera
features, select “Settings” from the Main
Menu of the Information and
Entertainment System.
Under “Driver Assistance” the following
features can be selected:
View
Camera Delay
Camera Guidelines
Selecting “View” will activate the camera
view on the display.
07186S0001EM
Rear Back-Up Camera Location
07186S000218
Rear Back-Up Camera Display
170
STARTING AND OPERATING
Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow the
camera view to remain on the display
shortly after the vehicle is no longer in
REVERSE, followed by the previously
active screen.
Selecting “Camera Guidelines” will
activate the display of the dynamic
guidelines that indicate the route of the
vehicle while in REVERSE.
Warning!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Rear Back-Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your
surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Caution!
To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back-Up
Camera should only be used as a parking
aid. The Rear Back-Up Camera is unable to
view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using the Rear
Back-Up Camera to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using the Rear Back-Up
Camera.
Symbols And Messages On The Display
Indications On The Display
Through the Information and
Entertainment System settings, by
activating the "Camera Guidelines"
feature, guidelines can be seen on the
rear camera display. If activated, the
guidelines are positioned on the image to
highlight the width of the vehicle and the
expected reverse path based on the
steering wheel position.
A superimposed central line indicates the
center of the vehicle to assist in rear
parking maneuvers. The various colored
areas indicate the distance from the rear
of the vehicle.
The table below shows the approximate
distances for each area:
Area
Distance from the
rear of the vehicle
Red
0–11.8
inches (0–30
cm)
Yellow
11.8 inches to 3.3 feet
(30cm–1m)
Green
3.3feetormore(1m
or more)
Messages On The Display
If the trunk lid is lifted, the camera will
not detect any obstacle behind the
vehicle. The display will show a dedicated
warning message.
Make sure the trunk lid is closed by
pushing next to the lock until it clicks.
Important Notes
Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the
camera may reduce its sensitivity. It is
important to keep the camera surface
clean, and free from debris.
When parking, be aware of obstacles
that may be above or under the camera
range.
171
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
Refueling The Vehicle
Before refueling, make sure that the fuel
type is correct.
Also, stop the engine before refueling.
Note: An inefficient catalytic converter
leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus
contributing to air pollution.
Caution!
Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank,
even in small amounts in an emergency, as
this would damage the catalytic converter
beyond repair.
Refueling Capacity
To ensure that you fill the tank
completely, top off twice after the first
click of the fuel nozzle.
Further top-off could cause faults in the
fuel feeding system.
Refueling Procedure
The fuel filler door is unlocked when the
central door locking system is unlocked.
It is automatically locked when the
central locking system is applied.
Opening The Fuel Filler Door
To refuel proceed as follows:
1. Open fuel filler door by pressing on
the point shown by the arrow.
2. Remove the fuel filler cap.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the
filler pipe.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts
off, before removing the nozzle, wait for
at least 10 seconds in order for the fuel
to flow inside the tank.
5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten
the gas cap about ¼ turn until you hear
one click. This is an indication that cap is
properly tightened.
The label indicates the fuel type
(UNLEADED FUEL = gasoline).
Emergency Fuel Door Opening
In the event of an emergency the fuel
filler door can be opened by operating
from inside the trunk.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the trunk and locate the
emergency fuel filler release cap on the
inside lining.
2. Open the cap, and pull the cord inside
to unlock the fuel filler door.
3. Open the fuel filler door by pressing
on it (see the previous instructions).
07206S0001EM
Fuel Door
07206S0002EM
Fuel Door Label
172
STARTING AND OPERATING
Warning!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the MIL to
turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped
into a portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
gas containers on the ground while filling.
Note: If the filler compartment is
washed with a pressure washer, keep it at
a distance of at least 8 inches (20 cm).
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration regulations, your
vehicle has a certification label affixed to
the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). A
Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the
Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The
bar code that appears on the bottom of
the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible
weight of your vehicle including driver,
passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum
capacities of front and rear axle systems
(GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
load on the front and rear axles. The load
must be distributed in the cargo area so
that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the
lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes
specified by purchasers for increased
durability does not necessarily increase
the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification
Label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be
equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for
the tire size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for
your vehicle for all loading conditions up
to full GAWR.
173
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as
the total weight of the vehicle with all
fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the
vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of
the front and rear of your vehicle at the
ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready
for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed
on a commercial scale to insure that the
GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the
vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and
rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show
that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so,
weight must be shifted from front to rear
or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be
sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely
before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have
an adverse effect on the way your vehicle
steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
Caution!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing is not recommended for
this vehicle.
174
STARTING AND OPERATING
SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING
Saving Fuel
Below are some suggestions which may
help you save fuel and lower the amount
of harmful emissions released into the
atmosphere.
Vehicle Maintenance
Checks and operations should be carried
out in accordance with the Maintenance
Plan. Refer to "Scheduled Servicing" in
"Servicing And Maintenance" for further
information.
Tires
Check the tire pressures at least once
every four weeks: if the pressure is too
low, consumption levels increase as
resistance to rolling is higher.
Unnecessary Loads
Do not travel with an overloaded trunk.
The weight of the vehicle and its
arrangement greatly affect fuel
consumption and stability.
Electric Devices
Use electrical systems only for the
amount of time needed. The rear window
defroster, additional headlights,
windshield wipers and heater blower fan
require a considerable amount of energy;
increasing the current uptake increases
fuel consumption (by up to +25% when
city driving).
Climate Control System
Using the climate control system will
increase consumption: use standard
ventilation when the temperature
outside permits.
Devices for Aerodynamic Control
The use of non-certified devices for
aerodynamic control may adversely
affect air drag and consumption levels.
Driving Style
Starting
Do not warm up the engine at low or high
revs when the vehicle is stationary; this
causes the engine to warm up more
slowly, thereby increasing fuel
consumption and emissions. It is
therefore advisable to drive off
immediately, slowly, avoiding high
speeds: by doing this the engine will
warm up more quickly.
Unnecessary Actions
Avoid revving up when starting at traffic
lights or before stopping the engine. This
action is unnecessary and causes
increased fuel consumption and
pollution.
Gear Selection
Use a high gear when traffic and road
conditions allow it. Using a low gear for
faster acceleration will increase fuel
consumption. Improper use of a high gear
increases consumption, emissions and
engine wear.
Max. Speed
Fuel consumption considerably increases
as speed increases. Maintain a constant
speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and
acceleration, which cost in terms of both
fuel consumption and emissions.
Acceleration
Accelerating violently severely affects
consumption and emissions: acceleration
should be gradual and should not exceed
the maximum torque.
Conditions Of Use
Cold Starting
Short trips and frequent cold starts will
not allow the engine to reach optimum
operating temperature. This results in a
significant increase in consumption
levels (from +15 to +30% in city driving)
and emissions.
Traffic And Road Conditions
High fuel consumption is caused by heavy
traffic, for instance when travelling in
traffic with frequent use of low gears or
in cities with many traffic lights. Winding
mountain roads and rough road surfaces
also adversely affect consumption.
Stops In Traffic
During prolonged stops (e.g. railway
crossings) turn off the engine.
175
Transporting Passengers
Warning!
It is extremely dangerous to leave
children in a parked vehicle when the
temperature outside is very high. The heat
inside the passenger compartment may
have serious, or even fatal, consequences.
Never travel in the trunk of the vehicle. In
the event of an accident, anyone inside the
trunk would be at greater risk of serious or
even fatal injury.
Ensure that all the occupants of the
vehicle wear their seat belts correctly and
that any children are positioned correctly on
the dedicated child restraint systems.
Transporting Animals
The intervention of the airbags may be
dangerous for an animal on the front
seat. It is therefore advised to arrange
animals on the rear seat inside dedicated
cages restrained by the vehicle’s seat
belts.
Keep in mind that, in the event of a
sudden braking or an accident, an
inadequately restrained animal may be
projected within the passenger
compartment, risking injury to the animal
itself and the other occupants of the
vehicle.
Exhaust Gas
Exhaust emissions are very dangerous,
and may be lethal. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas which
can cause fainting and poisoning if
inhaled.
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, take
the following measures:
Do not keep the engine running in
closed spaces.
If, for some reason (e.g. transporting
bulky loads), it is necessary to drive with
the trunk open, close all the windows and
run the climate control fan at maximum
speed. DO NOTactivate air recirculation
mode.
Should it be necessary to stay in the
stationary vehicle with engine running,
adjust the ventilation/heating system
and operate the fan in such a way that
outside air will enter the passenger
compartment. Activate the maximum fan
speed.
Maintenance of the exhaust system
provides the best protection against
leaks of carbon monoxide into the
passenger compartment.
Should an unusual noise from the exhaust
system or the presence of exhaust gas in
the passenger compartment be
identified, or if the underbody or rear
section of the vehicle is damaged, have
the entire exhaust system and bodywork
areas checked to identify any
components which are broken, damaged,
worn or have moved from their correct
fitting position. If any of these things
occur, contact your authorized dealer.
Open welding or loose connections may
permit exhaust gas to enter the
passenger compartment.
Check the exhaust system each time the
vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change operations. Replace the
components if necessary, contact your
authorized dealer.
176
STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb?
At times, a problem such as these may
interfere with your driving experience.
The section on emergencies can help you
to deal with critical situations
independently.
In an emergency, we recommend that you
call the phone number found in the
Warranty Book.
You may also consider contacting an
authorized dealer.
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS .....178
BULB REPLACEMENT .........178
FUSES ...................183
JUMP STARTING ............188
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY .....190
ENGINE OVERHEATING ........190
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . .192
TOW EYES ................193
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) .............195
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . .195
177
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
The Hazard Warning switch is located in
the switch bank below the radio screen.
Push the switch once to
turn the hazard warning
flashers on. When the
switch is activated, all
directional turn signals
will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a
second time to turn the hazard warning
flashers off.
This is an emergency warning system and
it should not be used when the vehicle is
in motion. Use it when your vehicle is
disabled and is creating a safety hazard
for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the hazard warning flashers
will continue to operate even though the
ignition is cycled to OFF.
Caution!
Prolonged use of the hazard warning
flashers may discharge the vehicle’s battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
General Instructions
Before replacing a bulb, check the
contacts for oxidation.
Replace blown bulbs with others of the
same type and power.
After replacing a headlight bulb,
always check its alignment.
When a light is not working, check that
the corresponding fuse is intact before
changing the bulb. For the location of
fuses, refer to “Fuses” in this chapter.
Note: In some particular climate
conditions, such as low temperature,
humidity, or after washing the car, a thin
condensation layer may form on the
internal surfaces of the front and rear
headlights. This condensation will
disappear after switching on the
headlights.
08016S0001EM1
Hazard Warning Switch
178
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Types Of Bulbs
The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs
Glass Bulbs (Type A):
They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.
Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press
the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.
Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.
Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the
side and pull it out.
Halogen Bulbs (Type E): To remove the bulb, turn it counterclockwise.
Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): to remove the bulb, contact an
authorized dealer.
179
Replacement Bulbs
Light bulbs Type Power
Front direction indicators PY24W 24 W
Rear
Fog lights H11 55 W
Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25 W
Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35 W
Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1 W
Glove compartment light W5W 4 W
Trunk lid light W5W 5 W
Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5 W
180
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Note: Only replace the bulb when the
engine is off. Also ensure that the engine
is cold, to prevent the risk of burns.
Direction Indicators
To change the bulb of these lights,
proceed as follows:
1. Operating inside the engine
compartment, remove the protective
cover.
2. Remove protective cover.
3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly
counterclockwise, and then slide it off
the headlight body.
4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the
bulb holder.
5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is
correctly inserted in the bulb holder.
6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in
the housing on the headlight body and
turn it clockwise, making sure that it is
locked correctly.
7. Install the protective cover.
Front Light Cluster with Main Beam
Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights
To replace the bulbs of the main beam
headlights, contact your authorized
dealer.
Caution!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Courtesy Mirror Light
To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the
lens, using a suitable tool.
08026S0023EM
Protective Cover Location
08026S0006EM
Protective Cover
08026S0007EM
Bulb/Connector
08026S0008EM
Sun Visor
1 — Mirror Cover
2 — Lens
181
2. Change the bulb, releasing it from the
side contacts, then insert the new bulb,
making sure that it is correctly fastened
between the contacts.
3. Install the lens, inserting it firstly on
one side and then pressing on the other
side until it clicks into place.
Glove Compartment Light
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Remove the courtesy light assembly,
using a suitable tool.
3. Open protective cover up and remove
the bulb pulling out of the connector.
4. Install bulb, making sure that it is
correctly inserted fully.
5. Close the protective cover on the lens.
6. Install courtesy light, inserting it first
on one side and then pressing on the
other side until it clicks into place.
Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights
To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:
1. Open the trunk, and remove the trunk
lamp assembly using a suitable tool.
2. Open protective cover up and remove
the bulb pulling out of the connector.
08026S0009EM
Courtesy Lamp Indent
08026S0011EM
Cover And Bulb Removal Direction
08026S0010EM
Ceiling Light Indent
08026S0011EM
Cover And Bulb Removal Direction
182
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Install bulb, making sure that it is
correctly inserted fully.
4. Close the protective cover on the lens.
5. Install trunk lamp in the correct
position, inserting it firstly on one side,
and then pressing on the other side until
it clicks into place.
Puddle Lights On Door Panel
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
1. Open the door and remove the puddle
light assembly, using a suitable tool.
2. Open protective cover up and remove
the bulb pulling out of the connector.
3. Install bulb, making sure that it is
correctly inserted fully.
4. Close the protective cover on the lens.
5. Install puddle light in the correct
position, inserting it firstly on one side
and then pressing on the other side until
it clicks into place.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems
against excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must
check the electrical circuit inside of the
fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power
outlets for extended periods of time with
the engine off may result in vehicle
battery discharge.
08026S0012EM
Puddle Light Indent
08026S0011EM
Cover And Bulb Removal Direction
2
3
1
0726067916
Blade Fuses
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical
Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir-
cuit
183
Fuse Extracting Pliers
To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked
to the fuse box.
Grab the pliers from the upper tabs,
press them, and extract the pliers pulling
upwards.
The pliers have two different ends, both
of which are specifically designed to
remove the different types of fuses
present in the vehicle:
After use, return the pliers to their proper
position by following the below
procedures:
Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs
and insert them into their housing.
Push downward on the pliers into their
housing until they click into place.
Warning!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that
the ignition is off and that all the other
services are switched off and/or
disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
an authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system,
transmission system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Fuse Location
The fuses, which can be replaced by the
user, are grouped in two boxes below the
passenger side foot board and inside the
trunk.
08036S0002EM
J-CASE Fuse
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical Cir-
cuit
3 — Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir-
cuit
08036S0053EM
Fuse Box
08036S0005EM
Fuse Extracting Pliers
1 — MINI fuse
2 — J-CASE fuse
184
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Control Unit Under Passenger Side
Footboard
To access the fuses, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on
the passenger side, pulling to release the
two buttons.
Release Buttons On Footboard
1 — Footboard
2. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove
the panel pulling downward.
Release Hooks On Footboard
2 — Panel
The fuses are freely accessible on the
control unit.
After replacing the fuse, make sure that
panel and footboard are correctly locked.
Luggage Compartment Fuse Box
To access the fuses, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the luggage compartment cover.
2. Remove the control unit cover.
The fuses are freely accessible on the
control unit.
The number identifying the electrical
component corresponding to each fuse is
shown on the cover.
After replacing a fuse, make sure that
you have closed cover correctly.
08036S0010EM
08036S0011EM
08036S0014EM
Control Unit
185
Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard
FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE
Front power window (driver side) F33 25
Front
power window (passenger side) F34 25
Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control
system, Alarm, Power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port
F36 15
Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), Doors
unlock, Central lock
F38 20
Windshield washer pump F43 20
Rear left power window F47 25
Rear right power window F48 25
Heater rear window coil F94 15
08036S0013EM
Passenger Side Control Unit
186
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Luggage Compartment Fuse Box
FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE
Tow hook module (TTM) F1 40
Hi-Fi
system F8 30
KL15/a USB Recharge (C070) F17 7.5
I-Drive / USB / AUX port F21 10
KL15/a 12V Power outlet (R053) F22 20
08036S0015EM
Luggage Compartment Control Unit
187
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it
can be jump started using a set of jumper
cables and a battery in another vehicle, or
by using a portable battery booster pack.
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
Note: When using a portable battery
booster pack, follow the manufacturer's
operating instructions and precautions.
Warning!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery
is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.
Caution!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack
or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
Remote Battery Connection Posts
The remote posts of the battery for jump
starting can be found inside the engine
compartment. The battery itself is
located in the luggage compartment.
The negative terminal (-) is positioned
next to the passenger side hood lock.
Warning!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
serious injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
The positive post (+) can be accessed by
removing the cover, and opening the
protective flap.
To carry out the operation, you need to
have the correct cables to connect to the
battery of another vehicle or a portable
battery booster pack to the remote posts
of the discharged battery. Usually, these
cables have terminals at the ends and are
identified by different sheath colors (red
= positive, black = negative).
08076S0006EM
Remote Negative Post Location
08076S0007EM
Protective Flap
08076S000118
Remote Positive Post Location
188
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jump Starting
Warning!
Failure to follow this jump starting
procedure could result in personal injury or
property damage due to battery explosion.
Caution!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged
vehicle.
Preparation For Jump Starting:
1. Firmly apply the park brake, and cycle
the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off all electrical features in the
vehicle.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start
the battery, park the vehicle within the
jumper cables reach, apply the park brake
and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Warning!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
Cable Connection
Proceed as follows to perform a jump
starting procedure:
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the
positive (+) jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the
jumper cable to the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the
negative (-) jumper cable to the remote
negative (-) post of the discharged
vehicle.
Warning!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
serious injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has
the booster battery, let the engine idle a
few minutes, and then start the engine in
the vehicle with the discharged battery. If
using a portable battery booster pack,
before starting the vehicle, wait a few
seconds after completing the connection.
Cable Disconnection
Once the engine is started, remove the
connection cables in reverse sequence,
as described below:
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper
cable from the remote negative (-) post
of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
189
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the
positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to
start your vehicle, you should have the
battery and charging system inspected at
your authorized dealer.
Caution!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s
battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular
phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Bump Starting
Never jump start the engine by pushing,
towing or coasting downhill.
Note: You cannot start a vehicle with an
automatic transmission by pushing it.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
Refueling in an emergency is described in
"Refueling The Vehicle" in "Starting And
Operating".
ENGINE OVERHEATING
Engine overheating may occur in
situations of extreme environmental
temperatures, frequent engine
stops/starts, or driving in heavy traffic. If
the engine becomes overheated, the
Engine Temperature Warning Light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate along
with a dedicated message. Refer to
"Warning Lights And Messages" in the
"Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel"
for more information.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by
taking the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place
the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not
increase engine idle speed.
190
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Note: There are steps that you can take
to slow down an impending overheat
condition:
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn
it off. The A/C system adds heat to the
engine cooling system and turning the
A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature
control to maximum heat, the mode
control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids
in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
Warning!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Caution!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge
reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned
off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call
for service.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
Do not go near the front of the vehicle.
Stop the engine. Wait until the steam
dissipates. Then, open the hood and start
the engine.
If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is
Escaping
Open the hood and idle the engine until it
cools.
Note:
If the cooling fan does not operate
while the engine is running, the engine
temperature will increase. Stop the
engine and contact your authorized
dealer.
If the engine continues to overheat or
frequently overheats, have the cooling
system inspected. The engine could be
seriously damaged unless repairs are
made. Contact your authorized dealer.
191
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for
towing a disabled vehicle using a
commercial towing service.
Caution!
The vehicle should be transported with all
four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed
of a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid
towing with only the front (or rear) wheels
lifted. When towing with only the front (or
rear) wheels lifted, in addition to damaging
the body, it could damage the transmission.
Do not use sling-type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to your
vehicle may result from improper towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remain released, while being
towed.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The operators of the assistance vehicle
must be informed with regard to the
vehicle's minimum height from ground in
order to avoid contact between the ends
of the bumpers with the equipment of the
breakdown truck.
The following image illustrates the front
and rear attachment corners of the
vehicle, to be taken into consideration
when loading the vehicle on the
assistance vehicle.
RWD Models AWD Models
A — Front Loading Angle 12.880°
15.160°
B — Rear Loading Angle 17.105° 18.400°
08126S0001EM
Front And Rear Loading Angles
192
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
It is recommended to tow the vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground on
the flatbed of a roadside assistance
vehicle.
Caution!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to your
vehicle may result from improper towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while being
towed.
If an assistance vehicle with a flatbed is
not available, the vehicle must be towed
with the rear wheels lifted from the
ground using a trailer or special
equipment allowing lifting of the rear
wheels.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
It is recommended to tow the vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground on
the flatbed of a roadside assistance
vehicle.
Caution!
DO NOTflat tow this vehicle. Damage to
the drivetrain will result.
DO NOTdolly tow this vehicle. Use of a
towing dolly can cause significant damage
to your vehicle.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
TOW EYES
If the vehicle has been in an accident or
has broken down, a tow eye is provided in
the tools container located inside the
luggage compartment for vehicle towing.
There are two locations on the front
bumper available for Tow Eye installation,
and one in the rear on the passenger side.
Towing is meant only for short distances
on a paved road surface.
Proceed as follows to use the tow eye:
1. Unhook the cap on the front (left or
right side) or rear bumper, pushing on the
upper part.
08136S0001B
Front Tow Eye Cap Locations
193
2. Remove the tow eye from its housing
in the trunk and carefully clean the
threaded housing on the vehicle before
using it.
3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place
(about 11 turns).
Note: The largest work angle of a tow
cable to fix on the tow hook must not
exceed 15°.
Warning!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
eyes.
Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow
straps may break or become disengaged,
causing serious injury or death.
Failure to follow proper tow eye usage
may cause components to break resulting in
serious injury or death.
Caution!
The tow eye must be used exclusively for
roadside assistance operations. Only use
the tow eye with an appropriate device in
accordance with the highway code (a rigid
bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a
short distance to the nearest service
location.
Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow
vehicles off the road or where there are
obstacles.
In compliance with the above conditions,
towing with a tow eye must take place with
two vehicles (one towing, the other towed)
aligned as much as possible along the same
center line. Damage to your vehicle may
occur if these guidelines are not followed.
When towing, only use a facility that can
tow vehicles with low ground clearances as
extensive damage can result by using a
standard tow truck platform.
08136S0003EM
Rear Tow Eye Cap Location
08136S0002EM
Work Angle Of Tow Cable
194
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an
Enhanced Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint
Systems” in “Safety” for further
information on the Enhanced Accident
Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event
Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint
Systems” in “Safety” for further
information on the Event Data Recorder
(EDR).
195
196
This page is intentionally left blank
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Correct servicing permits the
performance of the vehicle to be
maintained over time, as well as limited
running costs and safeguarding the
efficiency of the safety systems.
This chapter explains how.
SCHEDULED SERVICING .......198
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .......203
BATTERY RECHARGING ........206
DEALER SERVICE ............207
RAISING THE VEHICLE .........213
TIRES ...................214
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .231
STORING THE VEHICLE ........233
BODYWORK...............234
INTERIORS ................236
197
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct servicing is crucial for
guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle
under the best conditions.
For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned
a series of checks and services for your
vehicle at fixed intervals based on
distance and time, as described in the
Scheduled Servicing Plan.
Before each service, it is always
necessary to carefully follow the
instructions in the Scheduled Servicing
Plan (e.g. periodically check level of
fluids, tire pressure, etc.).
Scheduled Servicing is offered by an
authorized dealer according to a set time
schedule. If, during each operation, in
addition to the ones scheduled, the need
arises for further replacements or
repairs, these may be carried out with the
owner’s explicit consent only.
Note: Scheduled Servicing intervals are
required by the Manufacturer. Failure to
have them carried out may invalidate the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
You are advised to inform your
authorized dealer of any small operating
irregularities without waiting for the next
service.
Periodic Checks
Every month or every 600 miles ( 1,000 km) or before long trips check and, if necessary, top off:
Engine coolant level.
Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see an authorized dealer as soon as possible).
Windshield washer fluid level.
Tire inflation pressure and condition.
Operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.).
Operation of windshield washing/wiping system and positioning/wear of wiper blades.
Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km), check and top off if required:
Engine oil level.
198
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle
If the vehicle is used under one of the following conditions:
Dusty roads.
Short, repeated journeys less than 4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outside temperatures.
Engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of inactivity.
In the event of a long period of inactivity.
The following checks must be carried out more often than indicated in the Scheduled Servicing Plan:
Check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.
Visually inspect conditions of: engine, transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber elements
(sleeves/bushes, etc.).
Check battery charge and battery fluid level (electrolyte).
Visually inspect conditions of the accessory drive belts.
Check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter.
Check and, if necessary, replace cabin air filter.
Check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off-road environment or is operated
predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
199
Maintenance Plan (2.0 T4 MAir Engine)
Thousands of miles
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
Years
123456789101112131415
Thousands of kilometers
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
Check battery charge status with the proper instrument ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary.
Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and expire date
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction
indicators, hazard warning lights, trunk lid, passenger
compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning
lights, etc.)
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels
(1) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool)
and, if equipped, engine oil degradation
(2)
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody
protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes),
rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.)
● ● ● ● ●●●
Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade ●●●●●●●●
Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and
adjust nozzles, if necessary
●●●●●●●●
(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the system is intact.
(2) If oil degradation ratio (data collectable from diagnostic device) is more than 80% (oil quality less than 20%) engine oil and filter replacement is recommended.
200
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Thousands of miles
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
Years
123456789101112131415
Thousands of kilometers
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks,
cleanliness and lubrication of linkage
● ● ● ● ●●●
Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake
pads and operation of pad wear indicators
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the
accessory drive belt(s)
●●● ●●● ●●● ●●●
Change engine coolant ●
Change engine oil and replace oil filter
(3)
Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only) ●
Replace accessory drive belt/s
(4)
Replace air cleaner cartridge (5) ●●●●●
Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
Change the brake fluid
(6)
(3) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message in
the instrument panel. In all cases, never exceed 1 year/10,000 miles.
(4) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas
and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage,
the belt must be replaced every 2 years.
(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
(6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.
201
Thousands of miles
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
Years
123456789101112131415
Thousands of kilometers
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
Replace the passenger compartment cleaner (5) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o
Spark plug replacement
* ●●
(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
*The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply.
(o) Recommended operations
(●) Mandatory operations
Warning!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance.
This could cause an accident.
202
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Checking Levels
2.0 T4 MAir engine
09026S0002EM
1 – Engine Oil Filler Cap 4 –Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
3 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
203
Engine Oil
The engine oil level can be seen on the
instrument cluster display every time the
engine is started, or on the Information
and Entertainment system display by
activating on the main menu (MENU
button) the following functions in
sequence: “Apps”; “My Car” and “Oil
Level”.
Check on the display using the 6 notches
that the oil level is between the MIN and
MAX level: 1 notch MIN level, 6 notches
MAX level.
If the oil level is close to or below the MIN
mark, add oil gradually through the filler,
(refer to “Top-Up And Oil Level Indication
Update On Display” in this section)
considering that each notch shown on the
display corresponds to approximately
8.8floz(250ml).
Caution!
Make sure not to add too much oil when
topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess
may damage the engine. Have the vehicle
checked. Never exceed the MAX level when
topping off engine oil.
Caution!
The oil level is not refreshed immediately on
the display after topping off. Consequently,
wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the
display and follow the procedure below.
Note: Always reinstall the oil cap and
tighten to proper torque whenever it is
removed to add oil to engine. Never run
the engine with cap removed this could
cause oil to leak from engine.
Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update
On Display
If a engine oil top-off is needed, in order
to ensure the correct indication of the oil
level on the display, leave the vehicle on
flat ground with the engine running for
approximately 5 minutes (temperature
higher than 176°F (80°C)) and shut the
engine off then proceed with the process
below:
Start the engine again and idle it for
about five minutes.
Note: If you have added the specified
amount of oil and the indicator is not
reading “Full”, please contact your
authorized dealer.
Warning!
If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for
the engine to cool down before loosening the
filler cap, particularly for vehicles with
aluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk
of burns!
Caution!
The oil level must never exceed the MAX
mark.
If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (last
notch on the right turns red) after the fill-up,
go to your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the oil in excess removed.
Do not add oil with specifications
different from those of the oil already in the
engine.
Used engine oil and oil filters contain
substances which are harmful to the
environment. To change the oil and filters,
we advise you to contact your authorized
dealer.
204
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Coolant Fluid
If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of
reservoir and add the fluid described in
the "Technical Specifications" chapter.
Washer Fluid For Windshield
The windshield washer fluid reservoir has
a telescopic filler.
If the level is too low, remove reservoir
cap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluid
described in the "Technical
Specifications" chapter.
Brake Fluid
Check that the fluid is at the maximum
level. If the fluid level in the tank is low,
contact your authorized dealer to have
the system checked.
Automatic Transmission Activation
System Oil
The transmission control oil level should
only be checked at your authorized
dealer.
Useful Advice For Extending The Life
Of Your Battery
To avoid draining your battery and make
it last longer, observe the following
instructions:
When you park the car, ensure that the
doors and trunk are closed properly to
prevent any lights from remaining on
inside the passenger's compartment.
Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio,
hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on
for a long time when the engine is not
running.
Before performing any operation on
the electrical system, disconnect the
negative battery cable.
If you wish to install electrical
accessories after purchasing the car that
require permanent electrical supply (e.g.
alarm, etc.), or accessories which
influence the electrical supply
requirements, contact your authorized
dealer, whose qualified staff will evaluate
the overall electrical consumption.
Caution!
If the charge level remains under 50% for a
long time, the battery may be damaged by
sulphation, reducing its capacity and
efficiency at start the vehicle. The battery is
also more prone to the risk of freezing (at
temperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C).
Note: After the battery is disconnected,
the steering must be initialized. The
warning light on the instrument panel
switches on to indicate this. To carry out
this procedure, simply turn the steering
wheel all the way from one end to the
other, and then turn it back to the central
position.
Battery
The battery does not require the
electrolyte to be topped up with distilled
water. A periodic check carried out at an
authorized dealer, however, is necessary
to check efficiency.
Follow the battery manufacturer's
instructions for maintenance.
Replacing The Battery
If necessary, replace the battery with
another original battery with the same
specifications. Follow the battery
manufacturer’s instructions for
maintenance.
205
Warning!
Battery acid is a corrosive solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery acid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump
Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Note: It will not be possible to open the
trunk with a key or by pressing the button
in the passenger compartment when the
battery is disconnected. So, always
position the manual trunk opening strap
on the trunk lock before disconnecting
the battery. The procedure is described in
the "Storing The Vehicle" paragraph in
this chapter.
BATTERY RECHARGING
Important Notes
Warning!
Never charge or recharge a frozen
battery: it may explode because of the
nitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals.
At all times while charging or recharging
the battery, make sure that any sparks or
open flames are kept sufficiently far away
from the battery.
Note:
Before using the charging device,
always make sure that it is appropriate
for the installed battery, with constant
voltage (below 14.8 V) and low
amperage (maximum 15 A).
Recharge the battery in a well
ventilated environment.
Before using any devices to charge or
to maintain the charge of the battery,
carefully follow the instructions
provided with the device in order to
properly and safely connect it to the car
battery.
You can recharge the battery without
disconnecting the wires of the vehicle's
electrical system.
To reach the battery, remove the
access panel inside the trunk.
Remove the protective cover and
connect the positive cable terminal of the
charger (usually red) to the positive
terminal (+) of the battery.
Connect the negative terminal of the
charger (usually black) to nut next to the
negative terminal (-) of the battery.
09036S0001EM
Battery Access Panel
09036S0002EM
Battery
1 — Protective Cover
2 — Negative Post (Nut)
206
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The vehicle is equipped with an IBS
(Intelligent Battery Sensor), which is able
to measure the charge and discharge
voltage and calculate the charge level
and the general condition of the battery.
The sensor is placed next to the negative
terminal (-) of the battery.
For a correct charge/discharge
procedure, the charge voltage must go
through the IBS sensor.
1. Turn the charger on and follow the
instructions on the user's manual to
completely recharge the battery.
2. When the battery is charged, turn the
charger off before disconnecting it from
the battery.
3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of
the battery charger and then the red
cable terminal.
4. Refit the protective cover of the
positive terminal of the battery and the
access cover to the battery
compartment.
Note: If a "quick-type" battery charger is
used with the battery fitted on the
vehicle, before connecting it disconnect
both cables of the battery itself. Do not
use a "quick-type" battery charger to
provide the starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
The following pages contain instructions
on the required maintenance from the
technical personnel who designed the
vehicle.
In addition to these specific maintenance
instructions specified for routine
scheduled servicing, there are other
components which may require periodic
maintenance or replacement over the
vehicle’s life cycle.
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Level Check
To ensure correct engine lubrication, the
oil must always be kept at the prescribed
level (see "Engine Compartment" in this
chapter).
Check the oil level at regular intervals, for
example every 1864 miles (3000 km).
It must be checked once full operating
temperature is reached.
The vehicle must also be parked on as
level a surface as possible.
The engine oil level can be checked using
the Information and Entertainment
system. To access the function, activate
the main menu (MENU button) and select
the following options in sequence:
“Applications”; “My Car”; “Oil level”.
Changing The Engine Oil
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the
correct servicing intervals.
Choice Of Engine Oil Type
To ensure optimal performance and
maximum protection in all operating
conditions, it is advisable to use solely
certified engine oils (see description in
"Fluid And Lubricants" in the "Technical
Specifications" chapter).
Additives For Engine Oil
It is strongly recommended not to use
additives (other than leak detection dyes)
with the engine oil.
The engine oil is a product designed
specially for the vehicle and its
performance may be deteriorated
through the use of further additives.
Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And Filters
For the disposal of the engine oil and
filters, contact the appropriate body to
determine local regulations.
Note: Used engine oil disposed of
incorrectly may seriously harm the
environment.
Engine Oil Filter
Replacing The Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter must be replaced
each time the engine oil is changed. It is
advised to replace it with a genuine spare
part, specifically designed for this
vehicle.
207
Air Filter
Replacing The Air Cleaner
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the
correct servicing intervals. It is advised to
replace it with a genuine spare part,
specifically designed for this vehicle.
Air Conditioning System Maintenance
To ensure the best possible performance,
the air conditioning system must be
checked and undergo maintenance at an
authorized dealer at the beginning of the
summer.
Caution!
Do not use chemicals to clean the air
conditioning system, since the internal
components may be damaged. This kind of
damage is not covered by warranty.
Replace The Cabin Air Filter
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the
correct servicing intervals. For cleaner
replacement, contact an authorized
dealer.
Warning!
Use only refrigerants and compressor
lubricants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some
unapproved refrigerants are flammable and
can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Warranty Information Book, located in
your owner’s information kit, for further
warranty information.
Lubricating Moving Parts Of The
Bodywork
Ensure that the locks and bodywork
junction points, including components
such as the seat guides, door hinges (and
rollers), trunk and hood are periodically
lubricated with lithium-based grease to
ensure correct, silent operation and to
protect them from rust and wear.
Thoroughly clean the components,
eliminating every trace of dirt and dust.
After lubricating, eliminate excess oil and
grease. Also pay particular attention to
the hood closing devices, to ensure
correct operation. During operations on
the hood, to be carried out with the
engine cold, also remember to check,
clean and lubricate the locking, release
and safety devices.
Lubricate the external lock barrels twice
a year. Apply a small amount of
high-quality lubricant directly into the
lock barrel.
If necessary, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Windshield Wiper
Periodically clean the windshield and rear
window and rubber profile of the
windshield wiper blades, using a sponge
or a soft cloth and a non-abrasive
detergent. This eliminates the salt or
impurities accumulated when driving.
Prolonged operation of the windshield
window wipers with dry glass may cause
the deterioration of the blades, in
addition to abrasion of the surface of the
glass. To eliminate the impurities on the
dry glass, always operate the windshield
washers.
In the event of very low outdoor
temperatures, below zero degrees,
ensure that the movement of the rubber
part in contact with the glass is not
obstructed. Use a suitable deicing
product to release it if required.
Avoid using the windshield wipers to
remove frost or ice.
Also avoid contact of the rubber profile
of the blades with petroleum derivatives
such as engine oil, gas, etc.
208
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Warning!
Driving with worn windshield wiper blades is
a serious hazard, because visibility is
reduced in bad weather conditions.
Note: The life of the windshield wiper
blades varies according to the usage
frequency. In any case, it is advised to
replace the blades approximately once a
year. When the blades are worn, noise,
marks on the glass or streaks of water
may be noticed. In the presence of these
conditions, clean the windshield wiper
blades or, if necessary, replace them.
Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades
("Service Position" Function)
The "service position" function allows the
driver to replace the windshield wiper
blades more easily. It is also
recommended to activate this function
when it is snowing and to make it easier
to remove any dirt deposits in the area
where the blades are normally
positioned, when washing.
Activation Of The Function
To activate this function, disable the
windshield wiper before setting the
ignition device to STOP.
This function can only be activated within
two minutes of cycling the ignition to
STOP.
To activate this function, move the lever
upward for at least three seconds.
Function Deactivation
The function is deactivated if:
More than two minutes passes before
cycling the ignition to the STOP position
after having raised the lever and putting
the wipers into service position.
The ignition is cycled to the ON
position and the windshield wiper control
is used.
If, after using the function, the ignition is
set back to ON with the blades in a
position other than rest position (at the
base of the windshield), they will only
return to rest position following a
command given using the stalk (stalk
upwards, into unstable position) or when
a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded.
Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades
Proceed as follows:
1. Raise the wiper arm, press tab of the
attachment spring and remove the blade
from the arm.
2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in
the dedicated housing in the arm and
checking that it is locked.
3. Lower the wiper arm onto the
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the windshield
wiper with the blades lifted from the
windshield.
Windshield Washer
The window washer nozzles are fixed. If
there is no jet of fluid, first check that
there is fluid in the reservoir (see
paragraph “Engine Compartment” in this
chapter).
09046S0001EM
Windshield Wiper Stalk
09046S0002EM
Wiper Release Tab
209
Then, check that the nozzle holes are not
clogged; use a needle to unblock them if
necessary.
Exhaust System
Adequate maintenance of the engine
exhaust system represents the best
protection against leaks of carbon
monoxide into the passenger
compartment.
If an unusual noise from the exhaust or
the presence of smoke in the passenger
compartment is identified, or if the
underbody or rear section of the vehicle
have been damaged, have the entire
exhaust system and adjoining bodywork
areas checked at your authorized dealer
to identify any components which are
broken, damaged, worn or have moved
from their correct fitting position.
Open welding or loose connections may
permit exhaust gas to enter the
passenger compartment.
Have the exhaust system checked every
time the vehicle is raised. Replace the
components where necessary (for these
operations, contact an authorized
dealer).
In normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter does not require
maintenance. To ensure that it operates
correctly, however, and prevent it from
getting damaged, it is extremely
important that the engine operates
perfectly.
To minimize the risk of damaging the
catalytic converter, proceed as follows:
Do not stop the engine or deactivate
the ignition with gear engaged and
vehicle in motion.
Do not attempt to start the engine by
bump starting.
Do not persist in using the vehicle if
idling is very irregular or the operating
conditions are very notably irregular.
Warning!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if
you park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
Cooling System
Warning!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when the
hood is raised. The fan starts automatically
and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling
fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn
the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
09046S0003EM
Windshield Washers
1 — Washer Nozzles
210
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Coolant Check
Your vehicle has two cooling systems and
they both need to be checked to ensure
they are at proper fill levels. Refer to the
“Engine Compartment” section for the
locations.
Check the engine coolant and intercooler
coolant level every oil change or before
long trips.
If there are impurities in the engine
coolant, the system must be drained,
flushed and refilled: contact an
authorized dealer.
Check the front part of the condenser to
check for any build-up of insects, leaves
or other debris. Should it be dirty, clean it
by spraying delicately with water.
Check the hoses of the engine/
intercooler cooling system to ensure that
the rubber has not deteriorated and that
there are no cracks, tears, cuts or
obstructions in the expansion tank side
and radiator side connectors. Should
there be any doubt regarding leaks from
the system (e.g. if frequent top ups are
required), have the seal checked at an
authorized dealer.
With the engine off and at normal
operating temperature, check that the
cooling system radiator cap is closed
properly.
Warning!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
Note: Before removing the coolant
reservoir cap, wait for the system to cool
down.
Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The
Engine/Intercooler Coolant
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty,
have cleaning and flushing carried out at
an authorized dealer.
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the
correct servicing intervals.
Note:
For topping up, use a fluid with the
same characteristics as those indicated
in the "Fluids And Lubricants" table (see
"Technical Specifications" chapter).
Do not use pure water, alcohol-based
coolants, corrosions inhibitors or
additional anti-rust products because
they may be incompatible with the
engine coolant and cause the clogging of
the radiator. The use of propylene
glycol-based coolant is also not
recommended.
Engine Cooling/Intercooler System Cap
To prevent loss of engine coolant, make
sure that the expansion tank cap is
closed. If it is open, screw it completely
until you reach/hear the click.
Periodically check the cap and clean it
from any foreign bodies that may have
deposited on the external surface.
Warning!
Never add coolant with the engine hot or
overheated.
Do not attempt to cool an overheated
engine by loosening or removing the cap.
The heat causes a considerable increase in
pressure in the cooling system.
To prevent damage to the engine, only
use the engine cooling circuit caps provided.
211
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is
subject to legal requirements: contact
the appropriate body to determine local
regulations.
Note:
To prevent the fluid from being
ingested by children or animals, do not
keep it in open containers or pour it on
the ground. If ingested, contact a doctor
immediately. Eliminate any traces of
fluid from the ground immediately.
When the vehicle stops after a short
trip, steam may be seen coming out from
front of the hood. This is a normal
phenomenon which is due to the
presence of rain, snow or a lot of
moisture on the surface of the radiator.
With engine and system cold, do not
top up with coolant beyond the
maximum level indicated on the
reservoir in the engine compartment.
Braking System
In order to guarantee the efficiency of
the braking system, periodically check its
components; for this operation, contact
an authorized dealer.
See the "Maintenance Plan" for the
correct servicing intervals.
Note: Driving with your foot resting on
the brake pedal may compromise its
efficiency, increasing the risk of
accidents. When driving, never keep your
foot on the brake pedal and don’t put
unnecessary strain on it to prevent the
brakes from overheating: excess pad
wear may cause damage to the braking
system.
When an insufficient oil level is
detected, contact an authorized dealer
to have the system checked.
Always keep the cap of the brake
fluid reservoir (in the engine
compartment) completely closed.
Warning!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”
in “Technical Specifications” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign
matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid
or fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder
reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly
during hard or prolonged braking, resulting
in sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid
its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
212
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Automatic Transmission
Use only a transmission oil with the same
characteristics as those indicated in the
"Fluids and Lubricants" table (see
"Technical Specifications" chapter).
Special Additives
Do not use any type of additive with the
automatic transmission oil. The
automatic transmission oil is a product
designed specially for this vehicle and its
performance may be compromised
through the use of further additives.
Caution!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Frequency Of Oil Changes
In normal vehicle operating conditions, it
is not necessary to change the
transmission oil.
Caution!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Replacing The Battery
If necessary, replace the battery with
another battery with the same
specifications. It is advised to contact an
authorized dealer for replacement.
Follow the battery manufacturer's
instructions for maintenance.
Note: It will not be possible to open the
trunk with a key or by pressing the button
in the passenger compartment when the
battery is disconnected. So, always
position the manual trunk opening strap
on the trunk lock before disconnecting
the battery. The procedure is described in
the "Storing The Vehicle" section in this
chapter.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an
authorized dealer which is equipped with
shop jacks or jack arms.
The vehicle lifting points are marked on
the side skirts with the
symbols.
09056S0001EM
Vehicle Lift Point Locations
213
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects
of the following information: Tire
Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
TireTerminology and Definitions, Tire
Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Note:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards.
P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/
65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is
based on European design standards.
Tires designed to this standard have the
tire size molded into the sidewall
beginning with the section width. The
letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards. The size
designation for LT-Metric tires is the
same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed
for temporary emergency use only.
Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on
U.S. design standards and it begins with
the tire diameter molded into the
sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
0601085395US
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum
Load
2 — Size
Designation
5 — Maximum
Pressure
3 — Service
Description
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and
Temperature
Grades
214
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P =
Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
215
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 =
Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
216
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both
sides of the tire; however, the date code
may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white
sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN
on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN
is not found on the outboard side, then
you will find it on the inboard side of the
tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DO
T = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway
use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
217
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The
vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for
a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation
pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Note: The proper cold tire inflation
pressure is listed on the driver’s side
B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at
least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
0806115150US
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
0806115151US
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
218
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important
information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried
in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the
front, rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire
must not exceed the load carrying
capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire
and Loading Information placard in
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And
Operating” section of this manual.
Note: Under a maximum loaded vehicle
condition, gross axle weight ratings
(GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. For further
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading
conditions of your vehicle, locate the
statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight
(if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example,
if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
GUID-054900418-high.tif
Tire And Loading Information Placard
219
(5) Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals
635 kg and there will be five 68 kg
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
Note:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. The following table
shows examples on how to calculate
total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying
seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
220
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Warning!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of
the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
GUID-054900419-high.tif
221
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of
your vehicle. Four primary areas are
affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety and Vehicle Stability
Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort
Safety
Warning!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result in
tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of
the vehicle to the other can cause the
vehicle to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation
affect the stability of the vehicle and can
produce a feeling of sluggish response or
over responsiveness in the steering.
Note:
Unequal tire pressures from side to
side may cause erratic and
unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to
side may cause the vehicle to drift left or
right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire
rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel
consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause abnormal wear patterns and
reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Over-inflation
produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear
edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a
good quality pocket-type pressure gauge.
Do not make a visual judgement when
determining proper inflation. Tires may
look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or
visible damage.
Caution!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure, always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the
placard are always “cold tire inflation
pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of
three hours. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if
subject to a wide range of outdoor
temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
222
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire pressures change by approximately
1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a
garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F
(20°C) and the outside temperature =
32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi
(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to
6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO
NOT reduce this normal pressure build up
or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed
Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at
safe speeds and within posted speed
limits. Where speed limits or conditions
are such that the vehicle can be driven at
high speeds, maintaining correct tire
inflation pressure is very important.
Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Warning!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressures
For vehicle speeds below 100 mph
(160 km/h), recommended cold tire
inflation pressures are listed on the Tire
And Loading Information Placard located
on driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge
of the driver's side door.
When driving at speeds 100 mph
(160 km/h) and above, increased tire
pressures and reduced vehicle loading
are required for high-speed vehicle
operation.
For driving speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h) recommended cold tire
inflation pressures are listed below
under "High Speed Tire Inflation
Pressure".Vehicle loading condition must
not exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver +
three passengers + 88 lbs. (40kg)
luggage).
223
Warning!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision.
Tires Wheel
Recommended Cold
Tire Inflation
Pressure
High Speed Tire
Inflation Pressure
Front Rear Front Rear
Original Equippment
225/50R17
94V M+S
Runflat
17x7.5J
32 psi/
220kpa
35 psi/
240kpa
39 psi/
270kpa
44 psi/
300kpa
225/45R18 91V M+S
Runflat
18x8J
32 psi/
220kpa
35 psi/
240kpa
39 psi/
270kpa
44 psi/
300kpa
225/40R19 93V XL M+S
Runflat
19x8J
35 psi/
240kpa
38 psi/
260kpa
39 psi/
270kpa
42 psi/
290kpa
225/40R19 89W Runflat 19x8J
35 psi/
240kpa
–
39 psi/
270kpa
–
255/35R19 92W Runflat 19x9J –
34 psi/
230kpa
–
42 psi/
290kpa
Snow Tires
225/50R17 94V M+S
Runflat
17x7.5J
32 psi/
220kpa
35 psi/
240kpa
39 psi/
270kpa
44 psi/
300kpa
225/45R18 91V M+S
Runflat
18x8J
32 psi/
220kpa
35 psi/
240kpa
39 psi/
270kpa
44 psi/
300kpa
224
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Radial Ply Tires
Warning!
Combining radial ply tires with other types
of tires on your vehicle will cause your
vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could
cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires
in sets of four. Never combine them with
other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when
flat.
The damage is only on the tread
section of your tire (sidewall damage is
not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of
an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire
repairs and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires
that have experienced a loss of pressure
should be replaced immediately with
another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to
drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph
(80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is
referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat
mode it has limited driving capabilities
and needs to be replaced immediately. A
Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle
loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer
while a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section
for more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously
without stopping.
Warning!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in
determining when your tires should be
replaced.
0806104865NA
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
225
These indicators are molded into the
bottom of the tread grooves. They will
appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this
section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent
upon varying factors including, but not
limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire
inflation pressures can cause uneven
wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for
earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed
rating of V or higher, and Summer tires
typically have a reduced tread life.
Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
Warning!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can
result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a
balance of many characteristics. They
should be inspected regularly for wear
and correct cold tire inflation pressures.
The manufacturer strongly recommends
that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the
paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in
this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire
sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found
in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating
to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a
tire.
It is recommended to replace the two
front tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an
authorized tire dealer or original
equipment dealer with any questions you
may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your
vehicle.
226
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Warning!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,
or speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index
or capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can result
in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
Caution!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false
speedometer and odometer readings.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire
Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please
refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Caution!
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an
automatic car wash with a compact or
limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original
Equipped Tire And Wheel — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
spare tire and wheel equivalent in look
and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may
be used in the tire rotation for your
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if
your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire
description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the
sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire
descriptions begin with the letter “T” or
“S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original equipment tire should be
repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to
mount a conventional tire on the compact
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed
specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact
spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Warning!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
227
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire may look
like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use
full size spare tire needs to be replaced.
Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for
temporary emergency use only. This tire
is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this
spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of
your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of
this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or
repair) the original equipment tire and
reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Warning!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,
do not drive more than the speed listed on
the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to
the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace
(or repair) the original equipment tire at the
first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially
aluminum and chrome plated wheels,
should be cleaned regularly using mild
(neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle
and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to
deterioration caused by salt, sodium
chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals
used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use
harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can
damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and
tarnishing.
Caution!
Avoid products or automatic car washes
that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many
aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic
car washes may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels
including excessive brake dust, care must
be taken in the selection of tire and wheel
cleaning chemicals and equipment to
prevent damage to the wheels. Select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
Caution!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner.
These products may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap is
recommended.
228
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Note: If you intend parking or storing
your vehicle for an extended period after
cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner,
drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will
remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when
braking.
Dark Or Low Gloss Wheels
Caution!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOTUSE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH
ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH
A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this
is all that is required to maintain this finish.
TireTypes
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all
seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and
Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All
season tires can be identified by the M+S,
M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both
wet and dry conditions, and are not
intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If
your vehicle is equipped with Summer
tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your
vehicle when ambient temperatures are
less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all
season designation or mountain/
snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Warning!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving
too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the
use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow
tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires,
select tires equivalent
in size and type to the
original equipment
tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four;
failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed
ratings than what was originally equipped
with your vehicle and should not be
operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or
an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire
inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve
performance on ice, skid and traction
capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires;
therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
229
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these
recommendations to guard against
damage.
Note:
Traction device must be of proper
size for the tire, as recommended by the
traction device manufacturer
Use on Rear Tires Only
Due to limited clearance, the
following traction devices are
recommended:
For a 255/35R19 tire, use of a snow
traction device with a maximum
projection of 7 mm beyond the tire
profile is recommended.
For 225/50R17, 225/45R18 or
225/40R19 tires, use of a snow traction
device with a maximum projection of
9 mm beyond the tire profile is
recommended.
Caution!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that
only traction devices in good condition are
used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
noise occurs that could indicate device
breakage. Remove the damaged parts of
the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device
manufacturer’s instructions on the method
of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device
manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Tires on the front and rear axles of
vehicles operate at different loads and
perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons,
they wear at unequal rates. These effects
can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. Rotation will increase tread life,
maintain traction levels and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
To resolve this problem, tires should be
rotated at each service interval
(approximately every 10,000 miles
[16,000km]). More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for
any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
Tire Rotations Not Recommended — If
Equipped
Due to different size tires and wheels on
front and rear axles tire rotation is not
possible for:
2.0T GME Engine Equipped with a
225/40R19 front and 255/35R19 rear
tires.
230
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Caution!
Damage to the vehicle may occur if
225/40R19 front and 255/35R19 rear
tires are rotated
Tire rotation contributes to the
preservation of the grip and traction
performance on wet, muddy or snowy
roads, guaranteeing optimal driveability
of the vehicle.
In the case of irregular wear of the tires
identify the cause and correct it as soon
as possible, by contacting an authorized
dealer.
Tire Rotation for Directional Tires — If
Equipped
Directional tires are equipped on the
following:
2.0T GME Engine equipped with same
size tires and wheels on front and rear
axles
The rotational direction of the tire must
be taken into consideration when
rotating the tires. The recommended
rotation pattern for directional tires is
shown below.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
It is recommended to avoid situations
with a large difference in wear between
the front and rear tires and to strictly use
winter tires of the sizes given on the tire
placard.
The AWD system and the original tires
are developed together to ensure the
vehicle’s best performance. When
changing the tires, it is recommended to
us the same “AR” marked tires, to
maintain the same level of performance
and component life.
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration.The specific grade
rating assigned by the tire's
manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must
conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these
grades.
09066S0002EM
Tire Rotation
231
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a
comparative rating, based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by
law.
Warning!
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
232
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle is left inactive for longer
than a month, the following precautions
should be observed:
Park the vehicle in an area that is
covered and dry, and well-ventilated if
possible. Slightly open the windows.
Check that the electric park brake is
not activated.
Carry out the procedure: “manual trunk
opening device” procedure described in
this paragraph.
Disconnect the negative battery
terminal and check the battery charge.
Repeat this check once every three
months during storage.
If the battery is not disconnected from
the electrical system, check its state of
charge every thirty days.
Clean and protect the painted parts
using protective wax.
Clean and protect the shiny metal
parts using special compounds available
commercially.
Sprinkle talcum powder on the
windshield wiper rubber blades, and lift
them off the glass.
Cover the vehicle with a fabric or
perforated plastic sheet, paying
particular care not to damage the painted
surface by dragging any dust that may
have accumulated on it. Do not use
compact plastic sheets, as they do not
allow humidity to evaporate from the
surface of the vehicle .
Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)
above the standard prescribed pressure
and check it periodically.
Do not drain the engine cooling
system.
Any time the vehicle is left inactive for
two weeks or more, operate the air
conditioning system with engine idling
for at least five minutes, setting external
air and with fan set to maximum speed.
This operation will ensure appropriate
lubrication for the system, thus
minimizing the possibility of damage to
the compressor when the system is
operated again.
Note: After cycling the ignition to STOP
and having closed the driver side door,
wait at least one minute before
disconnecting the electrical supply from
the battery. When reconnecting the
electrical supply to the battery, make
sure that the ignition is in the STOP
position and the driver side door is
closed.
Manual Trunk Opening Device
Proceed as follows if the battery needs
to be disconnected:
1. From the trunk interior covering,
rotate the plug counterclockwise of the
lock and extract the cord connected to it.
09086S0001EM
Trunk Compartment
0318134892US
Trunk Manual Release Cord
233
2. Make sure the free end of the cord
remains outside the trunk when closing
the trunk lid.
3. The trunk can now be opened
manually by pulling the cord.
4. After releasing the trunk, rewind the
strap around the plug, put it back into its
housing and turn it clockwise.
Caution!
The Manual Trunk Opening Device allows the
trunk to be opened without a key, even if the
vehicle is locked. Do not use this Device
unless the vehicle is parked in a secure area.
BODYWORK
Protection Against Atmospheric
Agents
The vehicle is equipped with the best
available technological solutions to
protect the bodywork against corrosion.
These include:
Painting products and systems which
give the vehicle resistance to corrosion
and abrasion.
Use of galvanized (or pre-treated)
steel sheets, with high resistance to
corrosion.
Spraying of plastic parts, with a
protective function in the more exposed
points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc.
Use of “open” boxed sections to
prevent condensation and pockets of
moisture which could favor the formation
of rust inside.
Use of special films to protect against
abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing,
doors, etc.).
Corrosion Warranty
Your vehicle is covered by Corrosion
Warranty against perforation due to rust
of any original element of the structure
or bodywork. For the general terms of
this warranty, refer to the Warranty
Booklet.
PreservingThe Bodywork
Paint
Touch up abrasions and scratches
immediately to prevent the formation of
rust.
Maintenance of paintwork consists of
washing the car: the frequency depends
on the conditions and environment where
the car is used. For example, it is
advisable to wash the vehicle more often
in areas with high levels of atmospheric
pollution or salted roads.
Some parts of the vehicle may be
covered with a matte paint which, in
order to be maintained intact, requires
special care.
To correctly wash the vehicle, follow
these instructions:
If high pressure jets or cleaners are
used to wash the vehicle, keep a distance
of at least 15 inches (40 cm) from the
bodywork to avoid damage or alteration.
Build up of water could cause damage to
the vehicle in the long term.
To make it easier to remove any dirt
deposits in the area where the blades are
normally located it is recommended to
position the windshield wipers vertically
(service position), for more information,
refer to “Dealer Service” in this chapter.
Wash the bodywork using a low
pressure jet of water if possible.
0318135355US
Manual Release Cord Shown With Trunk
Closed
234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy
solution over the bodywork, frequently
rinsing the sponge.
Rinse well with water and dry with a
leather chamois.
Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door
frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) with
special care, as water may stagnate more
easily in these areas. Do not wash the car
after it has been left in the sun or with the
hood hot: this may alter the shine of the
paintwork.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in
the same way as the rest of the vehicle.
If washing the car in a service that moves
the car, for cars with automatic
transmissions, PARK (P) must be cut out.
You have to shut off the engine in the
following conditions: car stopped,
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), push the
starter button for at least three seconds.
Note: Avoid parking under trees; the
resin dropped by trees makes the
paintwork go opaque and increases the
possibility of corrosion.
Windows
Use specific detergents and clean cloths
to prevent scratching or altering the
transparency.
Caution!
Wipe the rear window inside gently with a
cloth following the direction of the filaments
to avoid damaging the heating device.
Front Headlights
Use a soft cloth soaked in water and
detergent for washing cars.
Note:
Never use aromatic substances (e.g.
gasoline) or ketones (e.g. acetone) for
cleaning the plastic lenses of the
headlights.
When cleaning with a pressure
washer, keep the pressure washer at
least eight inches (20 cm) away from the
headlights.
Engine Compartment
At the end of every winter, wash the
engine compartment thoroughly, taking
care not to aim the jet of water directly at
the electronic control units or at the
windshield wiper motors. Have this
operation performed at a specialized
workshop.
Note: The washing should take place
with the engine cold and the ignition
device in the STOP position. After the
washing operation, make sure that the
various protections (e.g. rubber caps and
guards) have not been removed or
damaged.
235
INTERIORS
Periodically check the cleanliness of the
interior, beneath the mats, which could
cause oxidation of the sheet metal.
Seats And Fabric Parts
Remove dust with a soft brush or a
vacuum cleaner. Rub the seats with a
sponge moistened with a solution of
water and neutral detergent.
Leather Seats
Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or
slightly damp cloth, without exerting too
much pressure.
Remove any liquid or grease stains using
an absorbent dry cloth, without rubbing.
Then clean with a soft cloth or buckskin
cloth dampened with water and mild
soap. If the stain persists, use specific
products and observe the instructions
carefully.
Note: Never use alcohol. Make sure that
the cleaning products used contain no
alcohol or alcohol derivatives, even in
small quantities.
Plastic And Coated Parts
Clean interior plastic parts with a damp
cloth (if possible made from microfiber),
and a solution of water and neutral,
non-abrasive detergent.
To clean oily or persistent stains, use
specific products free from solvents and
designed to maintain the original
appearance and color of the components.
Remove any dust using a microfiber
cloth, if necessary moistened with water.
The use of paper tissues is not
recommended as these may leave
residues.
Genuine Leather Parts — If Equipped
Use only water and mild soap to clean
these parts. Never use alcohol or
alcohol-based products.
Before using a specific product for
cleaning interiors, make sure that it does
not contain alcohol and/or alcohol based
substances.
236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
For the enthusiasts, the technician, or
those who just want to know every detail
of their vehicle, useful information on
understanding how your vehicle works is
contained in this chapter and illustrated
with data, tables and graphics.
IDENTIFICATION DATA .........238
ENGINE ..................239
POWER SUPPLY .............240
TRANSMISSION .............241
BRAKES ..................242
SUSPENSION ..............243
STEERING SYSTEM...........244
DIMENSIONS...............245
WEIGHTS .................246
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........247
FLUID CAPACITIES ...........249
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ......250
PERFORMANCE .............252
237
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
is stamped on a plate on the front left
corner of the dashboard cover, which can
be seen from outside the vehicle, through
the windshield.
This number is also printed on the chassis
at the front left shock absorber and can
be seen by opening the engine
compartment hood.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Plate
The plates are located on the left side A
pillar and contain the data about:
Chassis number (VIN).
Vehicle type (USA and Canada only).
Color code.
Place of manufacturing of the vehicle
(USA and Mexico only).
Vehicle manufacturing date.
Maximum permitted weights.
Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA
and Canada only).
10016S0001EM
Vehicle Identification Number
10016S0002EM
Vehicle Identification Number
238
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
2.0 T4 MAir Engine 280 HP
Cycle Fo
ur
Number and position of cylinders 4 in line
Piston bore and stroke (mm) 84/90
Total displacement (cm³) 1,995
Compression ratio 10:1
Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 280
Maximum power (kW) 209
Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5200
Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 306
Maximum torque (Nm) 415
Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 3,300 – 4,400
Fuel
87 Octane Minimum, 91 Recommended, ethanol percentage is
0–15%.
239
POWER SUPPLY
Power Supply
2.0L T4 MAir Engine Electronic
timed sequential injection with knock control
240
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TRANSMISSION
Model Transmission Traction
2.0L T4 MAir Engine Eight
forward gears plus reverse
Rear-wheel drive
or
All-wheel drive
241
BRAKES
Model Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake
2.0 T4 MAir Engine Disc
Disc Electric
Caution!
Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.
To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is
better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.
242
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SUSPENSION
Model Front Rear
2.0L T4 MAir Engine
Independent
wheel double-wishbone
suspension
Independent wheel with multilink system
243
STEERING SYSTEM
Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type
2.0L T4 MAir Engine 35.50
ft (10.80 m)
Rack and pinion with electric power
steering
244
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions
Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with
vehicle unladen.
A
Front
Overhang
B
Wheelbase
C
Rear
Overhang
D
Overall
Length
E
Overall
Height
F
Front Track
G
Rear Track
H
Overall
Width (Incl.
Mirrors)
I
Overall Width
(Excl.
Mirrors)
31.30 Inches 111.02 Inches 40.47 Inches 182.80 Inches
56.54
Inches
(+)
57.09 Inches(*)
61.30 Inches(+)
61.38 Inches(*)
63.98 Inches(+)
63.15 Inches(*)
79.69 Inches 73.23 Inches
(+) RWD models
(*) AWD models
Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.
10106S0001EM
245
WEIGHTS
Weights (lbs) 2.0 T4 MAir Engine With AWD 2.0 T4 MAir Engine With RWD
Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and
without
optional equipment)
3602 3492
Payload including the driver
(*)
905 905
Maximum permitted loads
(**)
155 155
– front axle 2205 2205
– rear axle 2646 2646
– total 4723 4612
(*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum
permitted loads.
(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.
246
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This engine is designed
to meet all emission
regulations, and
provide satisfactory
fuel economy and
performance when
using high-quality
unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having a posted octane number
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. For optimal performance the
use of 91 or higher octane “Premium”
gasoline is recommended in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with the
required octane number, hearing a light
knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine
is heard making a heavy knocking sound,
see your dealer immediately. Use of
gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and
hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the
vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the
use of cleaner burning gasoline referred
to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains
oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve
air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended
reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded
gasoline with oxygenates such as
ethanol.
Caution!
DO NOTuse E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends
may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system
components, cause emissions to exceed the
applicable standard, and/or cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate.
Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15)
or gasoline containing methanol are not
the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to
run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or
liquid propane (LP) may result in damage
to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from
running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and
may void or not be covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-
containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane
number without MMT. Gasoline blended
with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance
in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT
be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask
your gasoline retailer whether the
gasoline contains MMT. MMT is
prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
247
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that
contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended.
Using gasolines that have these additives
will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level
of detergents to
further aide in
minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of TOPTIER
Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system
cleaning agents should be avoided. Many
of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active
solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm
materials.
Fuel System Cautions
Caution!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited
by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage the
emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or
ignition malfunctions can cause the
catalytic converter to overheat. If you
notice a pungent burning odor or some light
smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact an authorized dealer for
service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the
use of such fuels or additives is not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Note: Intentional tampering with the
emissions control system can result in
civil penalties being assessed against
you.
248
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
2.0 T4 MAir Engine
U.S. Metric
Fuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters
Fuel
tank reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters
Engine cooling system 2.2 Gallons 8.6 Liters
Intercooler cooling system 1.1 Gallons 4.3 Liters
Engine sump and filter 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters
Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters
Automatic transmission, 2.0 T4 MAir engine
9.9 Quarts (RWD Model) / 9.8 Quarts (AWD
Model)
9.4 Liters (RWD Model) / 9.3 Liters (AWD Model)
Differentials and reduction gears RDU 195 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters
Differentials and reduction gears RDU
230-TV
––
RDU 230-LSD differential - if equipped 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters
RDU 210/215-LSD differential - if equipped 1.1 Quarts 1.1 Liters
AWD System FAD transfer case 0.5 Quarts 0.5 Liters
AWD System TRANSFER CASE 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters
249
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the
Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications.
Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.
Engine Lubrication
Use Features Specification Replacement interval
Lubricant for engines
2.0
T4 MAir
SAE 0W-30
API SN
MS-13340
9.55535–GS1
According to the Maintenance Plan
If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top
up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.
250
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis Lubrication
Use Features Specification Applications
Lubricants and greases
ZF
8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission
SAE 75W-85 synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA9
Differential
RDU 195; RDU 230-LSD; RDU
210-eLSD; RDU 210/215-LSD /
2.0 T4 MAir engine
SAE 75W-80 APL GL-5 synthetic
lubricant
FPW9.55550-DA10 AWD System FAD transfer case
SAE 75W synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA11 AWD System TRANSFER CASE
Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes
Engine coolant
CUNA NC 956-16
ASTMD3306
MS.90032
Use rate 50% Not mixable with
different formulation products.
(*)
Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043
To be used diluted or undiluted in
windshield washer/wiper systems
HVAC
R1234yf or R134yf
(depending on market)
––
(*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.
251
PERFORMANCE
Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.
Models Maximum speed mph
Acceleration from 0–60 mph/0-100 km/h
sec.
2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP RWD engine 149
5.5
2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP AWD engine 149 5.1
252
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING
SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be
sure to bring the right papers with you, as
well as your warranty folder. All work to
be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance
log of your vehicle's service history, as
this can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's
problems or the specific work you want
done. If you've had an accident or work
done that is not on your maintenance log,
let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must
have your vehicle by the end of the day,
discuss the situation with the service
advisor and list the items in order of
priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal
daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized
dealer are vitally interested in your
satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly
recommend that you take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized
dealer have the facilities, factory-trained
technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first.
Most matters can be resolved with this
process.
If for some reason you are still not
satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact the
manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the
manufacturer's customer center should
include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Alfa Romeo Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA
(1-844-253-2872)
Alfa Romeo Customer Center (Canada)
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English)
Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)
254
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, the manufacturer has
installed special TDD
(Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired
customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing
1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing
difficulties that require assistance can
use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. ForTTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service
operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service
contract for a vehicle to help protect you
from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer's New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The
manufacturer stands behind only the
manufacturer's service contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer's service
contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the
mail within three weeks of the vehicle
delivery date. If you have any questions
about the service contract, call the
manufacturer's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents,
call (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind
any service contract that is not the
manufacturer's service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract
other than the manufacturer's service
contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer's
service contract, and you require service
after the manufacturer's New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to
the contract documents, and contact the
person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a
major investment when you purchased
the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also
made a major investment in facilities,
tools, and training to assure that you are
absolutely delighted with the ownership
experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
issues or related concerns.
Warning!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
255
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet,
for the terms and provisions of FCA US
LLC and FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov .
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers
who wish to report a safety defect to
the Canadian government should
contact Transport Canada, Motor
Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ .
256
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may
use either the website or the phone
numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard,
American Express, and Discover orders
are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals
provide the information that students
and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem
solving, maintaining, servicing, and
repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the
vehicle, system, and/or components is
written in straightforward language with
illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled
with diagrams, charts and detailed
illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find
and correct problems the first time, using
step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic
tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been
prepared with the assistance of service
and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures
as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Call toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
257
258
This page is intentionally left blank
INDEX
Accessories Purchased By The
Owner....................3
Active Safety Systems ..........92
Adaptive Cruise Control.........155
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) ............155
Additional Heaters.............48
Additives, Fuel ..............248
AFS Function ................35
AirBag...................112
Air Bag Operation ...........113
Air Bag Warning Light ........111
Driver Knee Air Bag ..........114
Enhanced Accident
Response.............117,195
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .....195
Front Air Bag .............112
If Deployment Occurs ........116
Knee Impact Bolsters ........114
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .120
Maintenance ..............120
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light......................112
Side Air Bags .............114
Transporting Pets...........130
Air Bag Light.............111,131
Air Pressure
Tires...................222
Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........19
Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) .....149
Alfa DNA System.............146
Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System ....92
Automatic Dimming Mirror ........32
Automatic Headlights ...........34
Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC)...................43
Automatic Transmission ........141
Auxiliary Driving Systems ........95
B-Pillar Location .............218
Battery...................205
Battery Recharging ...........206
Belts, Seat .................131
Blind Spot Monitoring ...........95
Bodywork (Cleaning And
Maintenance)
.............234
Brakes ...................242
Brake
Fluid Level ...........205
Brightness, Interior Lights ........39
Bulbs, Light ................132
Camera, Rear ...............170
Carbon Monoxide Warning .......130
Cargo Tie-Downs ..............54
Certification Label ............173
Changing A Flat Tire ...........213
Chart, Tire Sizing .............215
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light) .............89
Checking Levels .............203
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . .130
Checks, Safety ..............130
Child Restraint ..............120
Child Restraints
Booster Seats .............122
Child Seat Installation ........128
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat
Belt ...................127
Infants And Child Restraints . . . .122
LATCH Positions ...........124
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children ................124
Older Children And Child
Restraints ...............122
Seating Positions ...........123
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . .129
Clean Air Gasoline ............247
Cleaning
Wheels .................228
Climate Control ............42,44
Close The Hood ...............52
Compact Spare Tire ...........227
Contract, Service .............255
Courtesy Mirror Light (Bulb
Replacement) .............181
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .153,155
Cupholder ..................58
Cupholders .................58
Customer Assistance ..........254
Daytime Running Lights..........34
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) ......34
Defroster, Windshield ..........131
Dimensions ................245
Direction Indicators (Changing A
Bulb)...................181
Disabled Vehicle Towing.........192
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock —
Rear Doors ................24
Doors.....................20
Drive Train Control (DTC) System ....92
Driving Modes ..............147
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
System ..................95
Electric Park Brake............138
Electric Remote Mirrors .........32
Electric Steering Wheel Heating.....32
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise
Control) ..............153,155
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
System ..................93
Emergency Refuelling ..........190
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher .......178
Jacking .................213
Jump Starting ..........188,189
Overheating ..............190
Tow Hooks ...............193
Towing .................192
Emission Control System
Maintenance...............89
Engine ...................239
Block Heater ..............137
Engine Coolant Level .........205
Exhaust Gas Caution .........130
Fuel Requirements ..........247
Jump Starting ..........188,189
Overheating ..............190
Starting ................190
Temperature Gauge ..........61
Engine Compartment ..........203
Engine Compartment (Washing) . . . .235
Engine Oil
Level Check ..............204
Engine
Overheating ...........190
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ..............117,195
Environmental Protection Systems. . .58
Ethanol...................247
Exhaust Gas Cautions ..........130
Exhaust System .............130
Exterior Lighting ............33,35
Exterior Lights ............33,132
External Lights ...............33
Flashers
Hazard Warning ............178
Turn Signal ...............36
Turn Signals ..............132
Fluid Leaks ................132
Fluids And Lubricants ..........250
Forward Collision Warning ........97
Front Light Cluster With Main Beam
Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights
(Bulb Replacement)..........181
Front Seat Electric Heating .......27
Front Seats (Power Seats) ........25
Front Wipers
Wiper Operation ............40
Fuel
Additives ................248
Clean Air ................247
Ethanol .................247
Gauge ..................61
Materials Added ...........248
Methanol ................247
Fuse Boxes ................184
Fuses (Replacement) ..........183
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ....55
Gasoline, Clean Air ............247
Gasoline, Reformulated .........247
INDEX
Gauges
Speedometer ..............61
Tachometer ...............61
General Information ......97,102,162
Glove Compartment ............54
Glove Compartment Light ........38
Glove Compartment Light
(Bulb Replacement)..........182
GVWR...................173
Hazard Warning Flasher.........178
Head Restraints ..............29
Head Rests .................29
Headlights
Switch ................33,35
Headlights (Cleaning) ..........235
Heated Mirrors ...............33
Heater, Engine Block...........137
High Beam Headlights...........35
Automatic High Beam Headlights.......................35
Hill Start Assist (HSA) System......94
Hood .....................52
Hood Release ................52
Identification Data ............238
Ignition....................16
Installing Electrical/Electronic
Devices...................3
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display ......62
Reconfigurable Instrument
Cluster Display .............62
Instrument Panel Features
Instrument Panel Features ......60
Interior Ambient Lighting .........38
Interior Lights................36
Interiors (Cleaning)............236
Internal Equipment ............54
Jack Operation ..............213
Jump Starting ............188,189
Key Fob
Remote Keyless Entry .........14
Keyless Entry System/Immobilizer
System ..................18
Lane Change ................36
Lane Change And Turn Signals ......36
Lane Departure Warning System . . .167
LaneSense.................167
Lap/Shoulder Belts ...........106
Latches...................132
Leaks, Fluid ................132
Life Of Tires ................226
Lifting
The Vehicle ............213
Light Bulbs.................132
Types Of Bulbs ............179
Light Switch.................33
Lights....................132
AirBag..............111,131
Automatic Headlights .........34
Courtesy/Reading .......36,38,39
Daytime Running ............34
Exterior.................132
Hazard Warning Flasher .......178
Headlight Switch ..........33,35
Headlights .............33,35
High Beam ................35
Instrument Cluster ........33,35
Intensity Control ............39
Interior ................38,39
Map Reading ..............36
Park ...................34
Reading .................36
Turn Signal ...............36
Turn Signals ..............132
Loading Vehicle ..............173
Tires...................218
Luggage Compartment Light
(Bulb Replacement)..........182
Luggage/Cargo Capacity .........53
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine)..............89
Manual, Service..............257
Methanol..................247
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming ..........32
Electric Powered ............32
Electric Remote ............32
Heated ..................33
OBD System ................89
Occupant Restraints...........105
Overheating, Engine ...........190
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . .257
Paintwork (Cleaning And
Maintenance) .............234
Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System ....94
Park Sensors System ..........162
Passive Entry (System) ..........21
Performance (Top Speed)........252
Pets.....................130
Placard, Tire And Loading
Information ..............218
Power
Mirrors ..................32
Seats ...................25
Sunroof .................50
Power Sunroof ...............50
Power Supply ...............240
PowerWindows ..............49
PregnantWomen And Seat Belts . . .109
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...............110
ProlongedVehicle Inactivity ......233
Radial Ply Tires ..............225
Radio Frequency
General Information ......16,18,24
Radio Transmitters And Mobile
Phones ...................4
Rear Camera ...............170
Rear Cross Path ..............95
Rear Seats..................27
Rear View Mirrors .............32
Reformulated Gasoline .........247
Refueling Procedure ...........172
Refueling The Vehicle ..........172
Refuelling .................249
Reminder, Seat Belt ...........106
Remote Starting System
........134
Replacement
Tires ............226
Replacing A Bulb .............178
Replacing An External Bulb .......181
Replacing An Internal Bulb .......181
Reporting Safety Defects .......256
Restraint, Head ...............29
Restraints, Child .............120
Rims And Tires ..............214
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle......131
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle.....132
Safety Defects, Reporting .......256
Safety Information, Tire.........214
Safety Tips ................130
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...........130
Saving Fuel ................175
SBL Function ................36
Scheduled Servicing ...........198
Scheduled Servicing Program
(2.0 T4 MAir Engine Versions) . . .200
Seat Belt
PregnantWomen ...........109
Seat Belt Reminder ..........106
Seat Belt Reminder ...........106
Seat Belts ..............106,131
Child Restraints ............120
Energy Management Feature . . . .110
Front Seat ...............106
Inspection ...............131
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . .108
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..........106
PregnantWomen ...........109
Pretensioners .............110
Rear Seat ...............106
Seat Belt Pretensioner .......110
Untwisting Procedure ........108
INDEX
Seats .....................25
Head Restraints ............29
Height Adjustment ...........25
Power ..................25
Tilting ..................25
Service Assistance............254
Service Contract .............255
Service Manuals .............257
Servicing Procedures ..........207
Shoulder Belts ..............106
Signals, Turn..............36,132
Snow Chains................230
Snow Tires.................229
Spare Tire .................227
Spare Tires .............227,228
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ..............154
Cancel .................155
Resume ................154
Set ...................153
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .153,155
Speed Limiter ...............152
Split Folding Rear Seat ..........28
Starting ..................190
Cold Weather .............135
Starting And Operating .........190
Starting Procedures ...........190
Starting The Engine ...........134
Steering
Tilt Column ...............31
Wheel, Heated .............32
Wheel, Tilt ................31
Steering System .............244
Steering Wheel ...............31
Stop/Start System............150
Storage ...................57
Suggestions For Driving.........175
Sun Roof ...................50
Sun Visors ..................54
Supplemental Restraint System - Air
Bag ...................112
Suspension ................243
Symbols
....................6
Telescoping
Steering Column ......31
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ..........54
Tilt Steering Column............31
Tire And Loading Information
Placard .................218
Tire Markings ...............214
Tire Safety Information .........214
Tires ...........132,222,227,231
Aging (Life Of Tires) .........226
Air Pressure ..............222
Changing ................213
Compact Spare ............227
General Information ......222,227
General Information .........227
High Speed ..............223
Inflation Pressure ...........222
Jacking .................213
Life Of Tires ..............226
Load Capacity .............218
Load Capacity .............219
Quality Grading ............231
Radial ..................225
Replacement .............226
Safety ..............214,222
Sizes ..................215
Snow Tires ...............229
Spare Tire ...............227
Spare Tires ............227,228
Spinning ................225
Tread Wear Indicators ........225
To Open Hood ................52
Tow Hooks, Emergency .........193
Towing
Disabled Vehicle ...........192
TowingTrailers ..............174
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System)................
.102
T
raction Control System (TCS)......93
Transmission ...............241
Transporting Animals ..........176
Transporting Passengers ........176
Transporting Pets ............130
Tread Wear Indicators ..........225
Turn Signals .................36
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ......231
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt. . . .108
Use Of The Owner’s Manual ........5
Vehicle Changes/Alterations .......3
Vehicle Identification Number .....238
Vehicle Loading ...........173,219
Vent Operation ...............42
Warning Flasher, Hazard ........178
Warranty Information ..........256
Washer Fluid For
Windshield/Headlights........205
Washers, Windshield............40
Weights ..................246
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......228
Wheel And Wheel TireTrim .......228
Wheels And Tires .............214
Windows (Cleaning) ...........235
Windshield Defroster ..........131
Windshield Wiper .............40
Replacing Blades ...........209
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Smart Washing Function .......40
Windshield Wipers .............40
Wrecker Towing..............192
INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
3628065 Cover.indd 2 7/2/18 8:44 AM
ALFA ROMEO GIULIA
Third Edition Rev 1
Owner’s Manual
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.
Printed in U.S.A.
2018 OWNER’S MANUAL
18GABASE-126-AC
